Epson SC-T7200 SC-T5200 SC-T3200 Service Manual [PDF]
SERVICE MANUAL Large Format Color Inkjet Printer SC-T7200 series SC-T5200 series SC-T3200 series SC-T7200D series SC-T5
42 0 32MB
Papiere empfehlen
![Epson SC-T7200 SC-T5200 SC-T3200 Service Manual [PDF]](https://vdoc.tips/img/200x200/epson-sc-t7200-sc-t5200-sc-t3200-service-manual.jpg)
- Author / Uploaded
- ion ion
Datei wird geladen, bitte warten...
Zitiervorschau
SERVICE MANUAL Large Format Color Inkjet Printer
SC-T7200 series SC-T5200 series SC-T3200 series SC-T7200D series SC-T5200D series
Confidential SECP13-006
Notice: All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being informed of them. The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof. EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice:
Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2014 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. COMMERCIAL PRINTER PRODUCT DEPT.
Confidential
PRECAUTIONS Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) Personal injury and 2) Damage to equipment. DANGER
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER 1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR PROCEDURES. 2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK. 3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS. 4. WHEN DISASSEMBLING OR ASSEMBLING A PRODUCT, MAKE SURE TO WEAR GLOVES TO AVOID INJURY FROM METAL PARTS WITH SHARP EDGES.
WARNING 1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN. 2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE. 3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS. 4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS. 5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECONDSOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY. 6. WHEN AIR DUSTER IS USED ON THE REPAIR AND THE MAINTENANCE WORK, THE USE OF THE AIR DUSTER PRODUCTS CONTAINING THE INFLAMMABLE GAS IS PROHIBITED. 7. MAKE SURE AN ANTIVIRUS SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON THE COMPUTER USED FOR SERVICE SUPPORT. BE SURE TO HAVE THE LATEST VIRUS DEFINITION FILE FOR THE SOFTWARE.
Confidential
About This Manual This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS Provides a general overview and specifications of the product. CHAPTER 2.TROUBLESHOOTING Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting. CHAPTER 3.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling the product. CHAPTER 4.ADJUSTMENT Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment. CHAPTER 5.MAINTENANCE Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product. CHAPTER 6.APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference: • Connectors • Panel Menu Maps • Exploded Diagrams
Confidential
Symbols Used in this Manual Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages. Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment.
May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the components in question may be adversely affected.
Lubrication
Indicates that lubrication is needed for the parts after disassembly, when doing a maintenance or replacing a part with a new one.
Confidential
Revision Status Revision
Date of Issue
A
May 30, 2014
Description
First release
Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Contents Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................ 12 1.2 Basic Specifications ............................................................................................ 1.2.1 Basic Specifications ................................................................................... 1.2.2 Electric Specifications ............................................................................... 1.2.3 Ink Specifications ......................................................................................
2.1.3 Procedure after troubleshooting ................................................................. 60 2.1.3.1 If the trouble has been successfully solved ........................................ 60 2.1.3.2 If necessary to escalate the trouble case ............................................. 60
13 13 14 14
2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests ................................................................. 61
1.3 Printing Specifications ........................................................................................ 15 1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications .......................................................................... 15 1.3.2 Supported Media ........................................................................................ 16 1.3.2.1 Epson Special Media Table ................................................................ 16 1.3.2.2 Usable Commercially Available Paper Size ...................................... 19 1.3.3 Printable area ............................................................................................. 21 1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification .............................................................. 22 1.3.5 Stacker ....................................................................................................... 22
2.5 Trouble on Paper Feeding .................................................................................. 92
1.4 Hardware Specifications ..................................................................................... 24 1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight ............................................................................. 24 1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement ................................................................. 24 1.4.3 Part Names ................................................................................................. 26 1.5 Control Panel Specifications .............................................................................. 1.5.1 Control panel and LCD .............................................................................. 1.5.2 Menu Descriptions ..................................................................................... 1.5.3 Serviceman Mode ......................................................................................
29 29 32 54
Chapter 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING 2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 59 2.1.1 Preliminary Check ..................................................................................... 59 2.1.1.1 Before performing troubleshooting .................................................... 59 2.1.1.2 Check for the usage environment ....................................................... 59 2.1.1.3 Recurrence check of the trouble ......................................................... 59 2.1.1.4 Check for the counter values/history .................................................. 59 2.1.1.5 Test print check .................................................................................. 59 2.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................................ 60
2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error ........................................................................ 62 2.4 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles .................................................................. 88 2.6 Other Troubles .................................................................................................... 93 2.7 Trouble on Service Program ............................................................................... 94 2.8 Trouble on NVRAM Viewer .............................................................................. 95
Chapter 3 DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 97 3.1.1 Precautions ................................................................................................. 97 3.1.2 Cautions after assembling .......................................................................... 99 3.1.3 Orientation Definition ................................................................................ 99 3.1.4 Recommended Tools ............................................................................... 100 3.2 Parts Diagram ................................................................................................... 101 3.3 Disassembly Flowchart .................................................................................... 110 3.4 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure ............................................................. 3.4.1 Preparation for servicing ......................................................................... 3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit ..................................................................... 3.4.2 Housing .................................................................................................... 3.4.2.1 TOP COVER .................................................................................... 3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER .............................................................................. 3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE ................................................................. 3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B ............................................................. 3.4.2.5 IH COVER ....................................................................................... 3.4.2.6 WASTE INK TANK COVER ......................................................... 3.4.2.7 PRINTER COVER ........................................................................... 3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER .........................................................
116 116 116 118 118 119 120 121 122 125 126 127
7 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER ...................... 128 3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER .............................................................. 130 3.4.2.11 RIGHT BASE COVER .................................................................. 131 3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER ................................................................. 132 3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER .................................................. 133 3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER .................................................................. 134 3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER .......................... 135 3.4.2.16 LEFT BASE COVER ..................................................................... 136 3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER ................................................... 137 3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER ..................................................... 138 3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME ..................................................... 139 3.4.2.20 CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR .................................................. 140 3.4.2.21 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR ................................................ 141 3.4.2.22 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR ................................................ 142 3.4.2.23 INTERLOCK SWITCH ................................................................. 143 3.4.3 Electric Circuit Components .................................................................... 145 3.4.3.1 MAIN BOARD ................................................................................ 145 3.4.3.2 SUB BOARD ................................................................................... 148 3.4.3.3 SUB-B BOARD ............................................................................... 150 3.4.3.4 PSH BOARD .................................................................................... 151 3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD .............................................................................. 153 3.4.4 Carriage Mechanism / Ink System Mechanism ....................................... 155 3.4.4.1 CR COVER ...................................................................................... 155 3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT .................................................................................. 156 3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD .................................................................................. 162 3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC ....................................................................................... 163 3.4.4.5 CR FFC ............................................................................................. 169 3.4.4.6 CR SCALE ....................................................................................... 170 3.4.4.7 CR ENCODER ................................................................................. 175 3.4.4.8 CR TIMMING BELT ....................................................................... 176 3.4.4.9 CR MOTOR ..................................................................................... 178 3.4.4.10 CR HP SENSOR ............................................................................ 180 3.4.4.11 APG UNIT ..................................................................................... 181 3.4.4.12 PG SENSOR ................................................................................... 183 3.4.4.13 PUMP CAP UNIT .......................................................................... 184 3.4.4.14 IC HOLDER ................................................................................... 185 3.4.4.15 INK TUBE ..................................................................................... 189 3.4.4.16 CR UNIT ........................................................................................ 193 3.4.4.17 IM SENSOR ................................................................................... 196 3.4.4.18 PW SENSOR .................................................................................. 198
Revision A 3.4.5 Paper Feed Mechanism ............................................................................ 3.4.5.1 PF MOTOR ...................................................................................... 3.4.5.2 PF SCALE ........................................................................................ 3.4.5.3 PF ENCODER .................................................................................. 3.4.5.4 PF TIMING BELT ........................................................................... 3.4.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER ...................................................................... 3.4.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR ...................................................... 3.4.5.7 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR ..................................................... 3.4.5.8 ATC MOTOR .................................................................................. 3.4.5.9 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER) ......................................................... 3.4.5.10 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) ...................................................... 3.4.5.11 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR .................................................... 3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT ................................................ 3.4.5.13 REAR COVER ............................................................................... 3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR .............................................................. 3.4.5.15 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY ............................................................... 3.4.5.16 1st PAPER GUIDE ........................................................................ 3.4.5.17 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR ........................................................... 3.4.5.18 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR ......................................................... 3.4.5.19 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B ................................................ 3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE ................................................... 3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE .......................................................... 3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE ........................................................ 3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism .................................................................................... 3.4.6.1 CUTTER UNIT ................................................................................ 3.4.7 Fans .......................................................................................................... 3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN ......................................................................... 3.4.7.2 PW FAN ........................................................................................... 3.4.7.3 HDD FAN ........................................................................................ 3.4.7.4 SUCTION FAN ................................................................................ 3.4.8 Auto Take-up Reel ................................................................................... 3.4.8.1 TAKE-UP REEL COVER ............................................................... 3.4.8.2 TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR ............................................................. 3.4.8.3 TAKE-UP REEL LED ..................................................................... 3.4.8.4 TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH ............................................................. 3.4.8.5 TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD ......................................................... 3.4.8.6 TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR .............................................................. 3.4.8.7 TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD ................................................... 3.4.9 2nd Roll Unit (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only) ............................. 3.4.9.1 FRONT FRAME ..............................................................................
200 200 202 203 205 207 208 210 212 214 215 217 218 221 222 223 224 225 227 228 229 230 231 232 232 234 234 235 236 237 238 238 239 240 241 243 245 247 250 250
8 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 3.4.9.2 REAR FRAME ................................................................................. 3.4.9.3 LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR ............................................... 3.4.9.4 RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR ............................................ 3.4.9.5 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR ..................................... 3.4.9.6 LEFT COVER/LEFT LOWER COVER ......................................... 3.4.9.7 RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER .................................... 3.4.9.8 RIGHT REAR COVER .................................................................... 3.4.9.9 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY ................................................................ 3.4.9.10 SUB-C BOARD ............................................................................. 3.4.9.11 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR .......................................................... 3.4.9.12 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR ........................................................ 3.4.9.13 2nd ATC MOTOR .......................................................................... 3.4.9.14 2nd PF SENSOR ............................................................................ 3.4.9.15 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B ............................................... 3.4.9.16 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR ............................................. 3.4.9.17 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY .................................................................. 3.4.9.18 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY ................................................................
Revision A 251 252 253 254 256 257 259 260 261 262 263 265 266 267 268 270 271
Chapter 4 ADJUSTMENT 4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4.1.1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part .................................. 4.1.3 Adjustment Items ..................................................................................... 4.1.4 List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments ............................ 4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations ..........................................................
273 273 274 287 295 296
4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer ............................................................ 4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure ........................................................................ 4.2.2 NVRAM Write Procedure ....................................................................... 4.2.3 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation ...........................................................
297 297 297 298
4.3 ADJUSTMENTS (Individual) .......................................................................... 303 4.4 ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence) ........................................................................... 304 4.5 Installing Firmware .......................................................................................... 305 4.6 Image Print ....................................................................................................... 306 4.7 Counter Reset ................................................................................................... 307 4.8 References ........................................................................................................ 309 4.9 Initial Ink Charge Flag ...................................................................................... 310 4.10 CR Related Adjustments ................................................................................ 311
4.10.1 CR Belt Tension Check ......................................................................... 4.10.2 APG Function Check ............................................................................. 4.10.3 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Auto Adjustment ........................................ 4.10.4 CR Scale Check ..................................................................................... 4.10.5 CR Active Damper Auto Adjustment .................................................... 4.10.6 Auto Uni-D Adjustment ........................................................................ 4.10.7 Auto Bi-D Adjustment, acceleration/deceleration print correction ....... 4.10.8 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment .................................................... 4.10.8.1 PW Adjustment .............................................................................. 4.10.8.2 T&B&S Adjustment ....................................................................... 4.10.9 PG Check & Adjustment .......................................................................
311 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 320 320 322
4.11 Head Related Checks and Adjustments .......................................................... 4.11.1 Tube Inner Pressure Reduction .............................................................. 4.11.2 Head ID Input ........................................................................................ 4.11.3 Nozzle Check ......................................................................................... 4.11.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................. 4.11.5 Head Inclination Check & Adjustment (CR direction) ......................... 4.11.5.1 Head Inclination Auto Adjustment (CR direction) ........................ 4.11.5.2 Head Inclination Manual Adjustment (CR direction) .................... 4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR direction) ................................... 4.11.6 Head Slant Check & Adjustment (PF direction) ................................... 4.11.6.1 Head Slant Auto Adjustment (PF direction) .................................. 4.11.6.2 Head Slant Manual Adjustment (PF direction) .............................. 4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF direction) .............................................
325 325 326 328 329 330 330 331 331 333 334 335 336
4.12 Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments ................................................ 4.12.1 Ink eject & pressure reduction ............................................................... 4.12.2 Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning) ............................................................ 4.12.3 Initial Ink Charge ...................................................................................
337 337 338 339
4.13 Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments ............................................... 4.13.1 PF Belt Tension Check .......................................................................... 4.13.2 PC Scale Check ..................................................................................... 4.13.3 Media Feed Auto Adjustment ................................................................ 4.13.4 Cut Position Check & Adjustment ........................................................ 4.13.5 Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment ..................................................... 4.13.6 Rear AD Adjustment .............................................................................
340 340 342 343 344 346 348
4.14 Boards Related Checks and Adjustments ....................................................... 4.14.1 Main Board initial setting ...................................................................... 4.14.2 RTC Check & Adjustment .................................................................... 4.14.3 MAC Address Input ...............................................................................
349 349 350 351
9 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.14.4 Serial Number & USB ID Check & Adjustment ................................... 352 4.14.5 Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information Write to NVRAM .................... 353 4.14.6 Board Replacement Date & Time Setting ............................................. 354 4.15 Other Printer Checks and Adjustments .......................................................... 4.15.1 Suction Fan Adjustment ........................................................................ 4.15.2 Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset ............................................... 4.15.3 Roll Unit Nip Release ............................................................................ 4.15.4 Operation Panel Check (LCD & Buttons) ............................................. 4.15.4.1 Panel LCD Operation Check .......................................................... 4.15.4.2 Panel Buttons Operation Check ..................................................... 4.15.5 Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment .....................................
355 355 356 357 358 358 358 359
Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE 5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 361 5.2 Storing the Printer ............................................................................................. 362 5.3 Transportation ................................................................................................... 363 5.4 Exchange Parts ................................................................................................. 364 5.5 Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 365 5.6 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 369
Chapter 6 APPENDIX 6.1 Block Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 373 6.1.1 Main Body ............................................................................................... 373 6.1.2 Auto Take-up Reel ................................................................................... 374 6.2 Connection Diagram ......................................................................................... 375 6.3 Panel Menu Map ............................................................................................... 381 6.4 Part names used in this manual ........................................................................ 386 6.5 Exploded Diagram/Parts List ........................................................................... 389 6.6 Status Sheet ...................................................................................................... 390
10 Confidential
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.1 Product Description
Models
SC-T7200 series: 1118 mm (44 inch); supports Super B0
SC-T5200 series: 914 mm (36 inch); supports Super A0
SC-T3200 series: 620 mm (24 inch); supports Super A1
SC-T7200D series: 1118 mm (44 inch); supports Super B0
SC-T5200D series: 914 mm (36 inch); supports Super A0
Space saving design
Front access design allows you to set the printer near a wall because you can exchange the media, ink cartridges, maintenance box, and cutter from the front.
Further downsizing greatly reduces the occupied space compared with the traditional models.
New driver and applications
Supported paper thickness Up to 1.5 mm
Brand-new driver with simple UI
With the web UI OS-independent configuration and control of HDD through the Web are available.
Provides the job monitoring and management functions using a job monitoring tool.
Easy printing from Microsoft Office using dedicated plug-in software
Ink configuration Brand-new water color pigment ink configuration with excellent black tone important in quality CAD line drawing and highly vivid red essential for commercial posters Ink configuration: Cyan, Yellow, Magenta, Matte black, Photo black High-speed throughput Prints A1 plain paper in 28sec. High print quality
Improved shorter occupancy time of the host PC
Occupancy time of the host PC has been significantly shortened with ESC/ Page and HP-GL2/RTL.
By adding the optional HDD unit, PC-less re-printing and more shortened occupancy time become available.
For posters:
Excellent print quality in 4 colors, with resolution of up to 2800x1440 dpi, and in variable dot sizes (minimal 3.5 picoliter)
For CAD:
High quality CAD line drawing achieved by optimizing the combination of new inks and print modes
Lower running cost
Independent ink cartridges for each color
high-capacity (700ml/350ml/150ml) ink cartridges
PC-less enlarged photocopy Simply connecting a scanner enables PC-less enlarged photocopy.
Media handling
Large sized LEDs
Easier paper loading available thanks to the design for front-access and spindle-less with optimal height based on ergonomics
Supports continuous printing of drawings or posters (in a standard size such as A0, A1 or US-ANSI D/E)
Supports the large capacity stacker. (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Translucent printer cover allows you to check which roll paper is loaded easily
Equipped with large-sized LEDs for easier recognition of the printer’s error status. Supports double rolls. (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only) Supporting double rolls enables massive continuous printing using paper of the same type and improves the usability when switching paper rolls of different paper types.
Product Description
12 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.2 Basic Specifications
PostScript printing function (option) Newly designed hardware PS is mounted for high speed RIP processing with a high performance CPU. This enables ultra fast PS and PDF printing without any settings (compared with the traditional software RIPs) or dedicated PC.
1.2.1 Basic Specifications
Large format scanner (option)
Item
Large format magnified copying and computerizing copy data are available without any PC.
Specification
Print method Configuratio n of nozzles
On-demand inkjet Black
360 nozzles x 2 lines x 2 colors (Photo Black, Matte Black)
Color
360 nozzles x 2 lines x 3 colors (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan)
Maximum resolution
2,880 x 1,440dpi ESC/P Raster (commands are
nondisclosure)
Control code
HP-GL/2, HP-RTL
Paper feed method
Friction
RAM
1 GB For Main High-Speed USB
Interface
Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX/
1000Base-T)
Temperature
Humidity
Main body operation environment
10°C to 35 °C
When storing (packed)
-20 °C to 60 °C (within 120 hours under 60 °C, and within 1 month under 40 °C)
When storing (unpacked)
-20 °C to 40 °C (within 1 month under 40 °C)
Main body operation environment
20% to 80% (Non condensing)
When storing (packed)
5% to 85% (Non condensing)
When storing (unpacked)
5% to 85% (Non condensing)
*Nozzle set configuration is; Row A Row B Row C Row D Row E C
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Basic Specifications
M
Y
PK
MK
Row F Row G Row H MK
PK
Y
Row I
Row J
M
C
13 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.2.2 Electric Specifications Item
1.2.3 Ink Specifications Item
Specification
Rated voltage
100 to 240 VAC
Input voltage range
90 to 264 VAC
Rated current
1.0 A to 0.5A
Rated frequency Input frequency range
50 to 60 Hz 49.5 to 60.5 Hz SC-T7200 series: Approx. 64W
Exclusive ink cartridge
Pigment ink colors
Black system: Photo Black, Matte Black
Cartridge life
See the date printed on the package (at normal temperature)
Guaranteed life after installation
1 year (after mounted in the printer)
(within 4 days under -20 °C, and within 1 month under 40 °C)
SC-T3200 series: Approx.52W
Installed: -20 to 40 °C
SC-T7200D series: Approx.65W
Power consumption
Storage
SC-T5200D series: Approx.61W
Ready mode
Power OFF
0.5 W or less
Dielectric strength Leek current Compliance with regulations
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
(within 4 days under -20 °C, within 1 month under 40 °C, and within 72 hours under 60 °C)
SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series: Approx. 17W
3.0 W or less
(within 4 days under -20 °C, and within 1 month under 40 °C) Transporting (packed): -20 to 60 °C
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series: Approx. 16W
Sleep mode
Color system: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
Uninstalled (packed): -20 to 40 °C
SC-T5200 series: Approx.60W
Operating
Specification
Form
Capacity
700 ml/350 ml/110ml 700ml: W40 x L305 x H110 mm
1.5 kV rms AC for 1 min. (between AC line and chassis)
Dimensions
350ml: W40 x L200 x H110 mm 110ml: W25 x L200 x H110 mm
0.25 mA or less Conforms to International Energy Star Program (Category: the harmonic restraint measure guideline) Conforms to VCCI Class B (with full options installed)
Basic Specifications
14 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.3 Printing Specifications 1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications Item
Specification
Paper feed method
Friction feed
Return pitch
2.2049 μm (1/11,520 inch)
Paper feeder Feed speed
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Roll paper manual feed Cut sheet manual feed 300ms/ (1/6 inch)
Printing Specifications
15 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.3.2 Supported Media 1.3.2.1 Epson Special Media Table ROLL PAPER Note "*1": "*2": "*3": "*4":
SC-T3200 Series not supported SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series supported When the optional auto take-up reel unit is used (SC-T7200 series) Use the tensioner supplied with the auto take-up reel unit.
Size Name mm
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250)
Premium Luster Photo Paper (260)
Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (260)
Photo Paper Gloss 250
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
inch
406
16
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
406
16
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
254
10
300
11.8
406
16
508
20
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
406
16
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
432
17
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
"*5": When a scanner is connected "*6": : Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper expanding or contracting. "*7": When the large format scanner is connected
Core Thickn Diamet ess er (mm) (inch)
0.27
0.27
0.27
3
3
3
Borderless Print*6
√
Take-up*3 Enlarged*5 Forward
√
Backward
√
√
√
√
√
-
-
-
√
√
√
√
√
Head Alignment
√
√
Large Copy/ Large Scan*7
ICC Profile
√
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Glossy Photo Paper 250.icc
√
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Semigloss Photo Paper 250.icc
√
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Luster Photo Paper 260.icc
√ √
-
√
0.27
3
√
√
√
√
√
√
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Semimatte Photo Paper 260.icc
0.25
3
√
√
√
√
√
√
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Photo Paper Gloss 250.icc
Printing Specifications
16 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Size Name mm
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (170)
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (170)
Enhanced Matte Paper
Doubleweight Matte Paper
Singleweight Matte Paper
Enhanced Synthetic Paper
Enhanced Adhenisive Synthetic Paper
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
inch
420 (A2)
---
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
420 (A2)
---
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
432
17
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
432
17
610
24
914*1
36*1
1118*2
44*2
610
24
1118
44
610
24
1118*1
44*1
Revision A
Core Thickn Diamet ess er (mm) (inch)
Borderless Print*6
Take-up*3 Enlarged*5 Forward
Backward
Head Alignment
Large Copy/ Large Scan*7
ICC Profile
√
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Glossy Photo Paper 170.icc
√
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Semigloss Photo Paper 170.icc
−
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced and Archival Matte Paper.icc
0.18
2
√
√
√
√
√
− 0.18
0.25
2
3
√
√
√
√
−
√
−
√
√
0.21
2
√
√*4
−
√
√
√
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Doubleweight Matte Paper.icc
0.15
2
√
√*4
−
√
−
√
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Singleweight Matte Paper.icc
−
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced Synthetic Paper.icc
−
EPSON SCT3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced Adhensive Synthetic Paper.icc
0.13
0.18
2
2
√
√
Printing Specifications
√
√
−
−
−
−
17 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
CUT SHEET Note "*1": "*2": "*3": "*4":
SC-T3200 Series not supported When MFP Scanner is connected to the SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series Series only. When the MFP Scanner is connected to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series, cut sheets are not supported. : Borderless printing available, but borders may appear or print quality decline due to paper expanding or contracting. Load the cut sheet, and then perform a copy operation.
Name
Size
Thickn ess (mm)
A2
0.27
A2
Enhanced Matte Posterboard
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
762 x 1016 mm (30" x 40")*1
-
√
√
√
EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Semigloss Photo Paper.icc
-
√
√
√
EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Luster Photo Paper.icc
-
-
√
-
EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced and Archival Matte Paper.icc
-
-
-
EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper.icc
-
-
-
EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Enhanced Matte Poster Board.icc
0.12
-
US-C 610 x 762 mm (24" x 30")
EPSON SC-T3000_5000_7000_Series Premium Glossy Photo Paper.icc
Super A3/B A2
√
0.26
US-C Photo Quality Inkjet Paper
√
Super A3/B A2
√
0.27
US-C Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper
-
Super B A2
Large Copy/ Large Scan*2
0.27
US-C Premium Luster Photo Paper
Head Alignment
US-C Super A3/B Premium Semigloss Photo Paper
Enlarged*4
Super A3/B Premium Glossy Photo Paper
Borderless*3
1.30
-
Printing Specifications
ICC Profile
18 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.3.2.2 Usable Commercially Available Paper Size
ROLL PAPER
This printer supports the following paper specifications for non-Epson media. C A U T IO N
Do not use paper that is wrinkled, scuffed, torn, or dirty. Although plain paper and recycled paper manufactured by other companies can be loaded and fed in the printer as long as they meet the following specifications, Epson cannot guarantee the print quality. Although other paper types manufactured by other companies can be loaded in the printer as long as they meet the following specifications, Epson cannot guarantee the paper feeding and print quality.
Item
Specification
Media types
Plain paper and recycled paper
Paper core size
2 inch and 3 inch
Roll paper outer diameter
150 mm or less SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series:
254 mm (10 inches) to 1,118 mm (44 inches) Width
SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series:
254 mm (10 inches) to 914 mm (36 inches) SC-T3200 series:
254 mm (10 inches) to 610 mm (24 inches)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Paper thickness
0.08 to 0.5 mm
Basis weight
64 to 260g/m2
Available width for borderless printing
254 mm/10 inch 300 mm/11.8 inch Super A3/B/329 mm/13 inch 406 mm/16 inch US C/17 inch/432 mm B2/515mm A1/594mm 610 mm/24 inch B1/728 mm A0/841 mm 914 mm/36 inch 1030 mm 1118 mm/44 inch
Printing Specifications
19 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
CUT SHEET Item Media types
Specification Plain paper and recycled paper SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series:
210 mm (A4) to 1,118 mm (44 inches) Width
SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series:
210 mm (A4) to 914 mm (36 inches) SC-T3200 series:
210 mm (A4) to 610 mm (24 inches) Length
279.4 to 1,580 mm
Paper thickness
0.08 to 0.8 mm (Board paper: 0.8 mm to 1.5 m)
Basis weight
64 to 260g/m2
Available width for borderless printing
254 mm/10 inch 300 mm/11.8 inch Super A3/329 mm/13 inch 406 mm/16 inch US C/17 inch/432mm B2/515 mm A1/594 mm 610 mm/24 inch B1/728 mm A0/841 mm 914 mm/36 inch B0/1030 mm 1118 mm/44 inch
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printing Specifications
20 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.3.3 Printable area
Table 1-1. Roll Paper Margin Roll Paper Margin Parameter
ROLL PAPER Note "*1": "*2": "*3": "*4":
Margin Values A = 45mm
SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series SC-T3200 series If “Banner” is selected for “Roll Paper Option” in the printer driver “Advanced” tab, the top and bottom margins are 0 mm.
3mm/15mm
254mm~1118mm 㪁㪈 254mm~914mm 㪁㪉 254mm~620mm 㪁㪊
0mm/3mm
C 㪁㪋
3mm/15mm
Top45mm/Bottom15mm
C =15mm B, D = 3mm
3mm
A, B, C, D = 3mm
15mm
A, B, C, D = 15mm
Note "*": When “Normal” is selected, the value for A is 20 mm for the following paper. Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) / Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250) / Premium Luster Photo Paper (260) / Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (260) When the following media are used in the “CAD / Line Drawing” mode, the value for A and C is 3 mm. Singleweight Matte/Plain Paper/Tracing Paper/Tracing Paper
~
127mm 15m
CUT SHEET
D
B
Note "*1": SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series "*2": SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series "*3": SC-T3200 series A
3~45mm
㪁㪋
210mm~1118mm 㶎㪈 210mm~914mm 㶎㪉 210mm~620mm 㶎㪊
Table 1-1. Roll Paper Margin Roll Paper Margin Parameter Normal Top15mm/Bottom15mm
Margin Values A, C = 15mm* B, D = 3mm A, C = 15mm B, D = 3mm A = 35mm
Top35mm/Bottom15mm
C =15mm B, D =3mm
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Printing Specifications
21 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification
Printer driver settings
Cutting Operation
AVAILABLE PAPER TYPE
The top area may become slightly uneven
depending on the image since the print operation stops while cutting the top edge of the roll paper. The printed paper is approximately 2 mm shorter than the specified size since the printer cuts the paper inside the image to avoid showing top and bottom margins. After cutting the bottom edge of the previous page, the printer feeds the paper, and then cuts the top edge of the following page. Although this produces 60 to 127 mm cut-off pieces, the cut is more accurate.
For the paper types and sizes that support the borderless printing, see "1.3.2.1 Epson Special Media Table" (p16).
A
ROLL PAPER CUTTING OPERATION Printer driver settings
Cutting Operation
Double Cut Explanation
B
A Borderless
Explanation
The default printer driver setting is “Borderless”.
B
1.3.5 Stacker SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series Table 1-2. Continuous Stacker
The top area may become slightly uneven
A Single Cut
B
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
depending on the image since the print operation stops while cutting the top edge of the roll paper. If the cut position is misaligned slightly, small parts of the image may be shown on the top or bottom of the adjacent pages. If this occurs, perform “Adjust Cut Position”. When printing only one page the operation performed is the same as that for “Double Cut”. When continuously printing multiple sheets, the printer cuts 1 mm inside on the top edge of the first page and the bottom edge of the subsequent pages to avoid showing margins.
SC-T3200 series
SC-T5200 series
SC-T7200 series
20 pages
20 pages
20 pages
A1 841 x 594mm
---
20 pages
20 pages
A0 841 x 1189mm
---
20 pages
20 pages
US-ANSI D 22 x 34 inch
1 pages
1 pages
1 pages
US-ANSI D 34 x 22 inch
---
20 pages
20 pages
US-ANSI E 34 x 44 inch
---
1 pages
1 pages
Paper size A1 594 x 841mm
Paper type Plain paper
Table 1-3. Single Sheet Stacker Product name
Maximum Width
Maximum Length
SC-T3200 series
All paper type / A1 + (approx. 610 mm)
Approx. 1,189 mm
SC-T5200 series
All paper type / A0 Portrait (841mm)
Approx. 1,189 mm
SC-T7200 series
All paper type / A0 Portrait (841mm)
Approx. 1,189 mm
Printing Specifications
22 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series Table 1-4. Continuous stacker specification Paper size A1 Portrait (594mm or less)
Paper type Plain paper
Stackable Pages SC-T5200D series SC-T7200D series 20 pages
20 pages
Table 1-5. Single Sheet Stacker specification Product name SC-T7200D/ SC-T5200D series
Maximum Width
All paper
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Maximum Length Large-capacity position
Compact position
Approx. 1,580 mm
Approx. 1,189 mm
Printing Specifications
23 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.4 Hardware Specifications
1.4.2 Installation Room Requirement
This section provides the printer dimensions and shows the main components.
1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight Model
Width
Depth*1
Height
Weight*2
SC-T7200 series
1,608 mm
762 mm
1,128 mm
Approx. 92 kg
SC-T5200 series
1,405 mm
762 mm
1,128 mm
Approx. 84 kg
SC-T3200 series (w/o dedicated stand)
1,050 mm
691 mm
613 mm
Approx. 54 kg
SC-T3200 series (w/ dedicated stand)
1,050 mm
762 mm
1,117 mm
Approx. 67kg
SC-T7200D series
1,608 mm
734 mm
1,128 mm
Approx. 133kg
SC-T5200D series
1,405 mm
734 mm
1,128 mm
Approx. 118kg
Figure 1-1. SC-T7200 Series/SC-T5200 Series
Note 1: When the paper basket is retracted 2: Excluding ink cartridges
Figure 1-2. SC-T3200 Series
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Hardware Specifications
24 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Figure 1-3. SC-T7200D/SC-T5200 Series
Figure 1-4. When the Large Format Scanner is installed Note "*1": SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series "*2": SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Hardware Specifications
25 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.4.3 Part Names
Table 1-6. Front Side No.
FRONT SIDE
Figure 1-5. Front Side
Name
1
Printer cover
2
Poster board support
3
Maintenance box covers
4
Paper basket/Large-capacity paper basket
5
Casters
6
Stack guides*
7
Stack guide switch lever*
8
Cartridge cover
9
Ink cartridges
10
AC inlet
11
Option port
12
USB port
13
LAN port
14
Data light
15
Status light
16
Control panel
17
Alert lamp
18
Roll rest
19
Adapter guides
20
Roll lock lever
21
Adapter holder
22
Paper slot
23
Print head
24
Roll paper cover
25
Paper eject guide
Note "*": SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Hardware Specifications
26 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
BACK SIDE
Revision A
ROLL 2 UNIT (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D SERIES) .
Figure 1-6. Back side
Table 1-7. Back side No.
Figure 1-7. Roll 2 unit
Name
1
Option slot
2
Roll 2 unit connector*
3
Rear cover*
Table 1-8. Roll 2 unit No.
Note "*": SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Hardware Specifications
Name
1
Paper slot
2
Drawer handles
3
Adapter guides
4
Adapter holder
5
Roll lock lever
27 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
ROLL PAPER ADAPTER
Figure 1-8. Roll paper adapter
Table 1-9. Roll paper adapter No.
Name
1
Adapter lock lever
2
Size lever
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Hardware Specifications
28 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.5 Control Panel Specifications
Table 1-10. Control panel Name
1.5.1 Control panel and LCD
1
Power button
Function Turns the power on and off. On: The power is on.
CONTROL PANEL
Flashing: The printer is receiving data or cleaning the
2
Power light
print head or performing other operations in the course of being shut down. Off: The power is off.
3
Load/Remove Paper button
Displays the Load/Remove Paper menu.
4
Screen
Displays the printer’s status, menus, error messages, and so on.
5
[Menu] button
Displays the menu for the tab currently selected in the display.
6
Back button
If menus are displayed, pressing this button takes you up one level in the menu hierarchy.
7
Left/Right buttons
Use these buttons to select tabs.
8
Up/Down buttons
When menus are displayed, these buttons can be used to highlight items or options. Displays the menu for the tab currently selected in the
display. When menus are displayed and an item is highlighted,
9
OK button
pressing this button displays the sub-menu for the highlighted item. If pressed while a parameter is selected from the Menu, the parameter is set or executed.
10
Help button
Displays the Help menu.
11
Maintenance button
Displays the Maintenance menu, which is used for nozzle checks and head cleaning. The printer enters pause status if this is pressed while
printing. Figure 1-9. Control panel
12
Pause/Cancel button
Pressing this button while a menu or help is displayed
closes the menu or help and returns the printer to ready status. It is used to manually cut roll paper using the built-in
cutter. 13
Feed/Cut Media button
If printing is not currently in progress and the printer is
loaded with roll paper, you can feed paper ahead by pressing first this button and then the [] button.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
29 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-11. LCD
LCD Name
Screen View 1
Function Displays the printer’s status, operation, and error messages.
Message Print Queues Tab
Displays print job status and can be used to access the Print Queues menu. Shows the type of paper in the printer and can be used to access the Paper menu. When roll paper is used, it also shows the roll width. When Roll Paper Remaining is On, it shows the amount of roll paper remaining. When the length remaining reaches or falls below the value selected for Remaining Alert, a icon appears above the tab icon and an alert like that shown below is displayed to warn that the printer is nearing the end of the roll.
2
Tabs/Info Display Area
Paper Tab
When roll paper is loaded on Roll 1/Roll 2 of the SCT7200D/SC-T5200D series, you can check which is selected (in use) by looking at the icon. Indicates a roll that is selected (in use).The number indicates either Roll 1 or Roll 2.
Indicates a roll in a standby state. If there is an automatic switching command, this roll is selected for printing.
Figure 1-10. LCD
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
30 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 1-11. LCD Name
Function Displays ink status. The ink cartridge status is indicated as follows. : No error. : Ink is low. Ink Tab
: Ink cartridge is expended.
: An error occurred.
: Non-genuine cartridge is installed. 2
Tabs/Info Display Area
Shows the status of the Maintenance Box and is used to display the Maintenance menu. Maintenance Box status is shown as follows. Maintenance Tab
: No error. : The Maintenance Box is nearing the end of its service life. : Maintenance Box is at the end of its service life.
Setup Tab
Displays the IP address and menus for various settings.
Large Copy Tab
This tab is displayed only when the optional Large Format Scanner is connected.
Enlarged Copy Tab
Displayed only when a scanner is connected.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
31 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.5.2 Menu Descriptions Note "*1": "*2": "*3": "*4":
SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D seriess only SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only When the optional hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only When the optional Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only
Table 1-12. Menu List Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Lists the estimated start time and time needed to print the selected job. It also predicts whether the job can be completed without replacing paper, ink or the Maintenance Box. The estimates are guidelines only. We recommend proceeding even if Can Not Complete is displayed. Remote Manager and the LFP HDD Utility display the reason for the Can Not Waiting Job Name Complete message and allow you to hold or cancel the job. User Estimated Start Time Printing availability by paper remaining cannot be performed correctly if Roll Paper Remaining is Off. Estimated Print Time The printer will not predict availability on the basis of the amount of ink remaining Printing Availability when documents are printed using LFP Print Plug-In for Office or EPSON CopyFactory5. When the printer printed using the PS driver included with the optional Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit, Estimated Start Time and Estimated Print Time are displayed as “0 minutes”.
Print Queue*3
Print Queues*3
Held Queue*2*3
View Hold Queue
Resume All Jobs
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Explanation
XXXXXXXXXXX (name of held job)
Paused Job Name User Paper Type Source Size Reason For Hold
This option is available only if On is selected for Store Held Job in the Setup menu, Displays the print settings for held jobs and the reason the job is held. Jobs that are held because the job print settings differ from those currently selected for the printer can be printed as described below. 1. Replace the paper and take whatever other steps may be necessary to ready the device for printing. 2. Select Resume All Jobs.
Press the OK button to resume all held jobs currently in the queue.
Control Panel Specifications
32 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Print Queues*3
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Saved Job
Queue*3
XXXXXXXXXXX (name of stored print job)
Print Job Log Sheet
Explanation Stored Job Name User Length Pages Paper Type Copies Source Size Estimated Print Time
Shows the status of the selected stored job when it was last printed. After viewing the job, press the OK button to enter the number of copies. Press the []/[] buttons to choose the number of copies and press the OK button to display the estimated print time and print availability. Press the OK button to start printing.
Press the OK button to print the print job log. Remove Paper Roll
Roll 1*1 Load/Remove Paper
Roll 2*1 Cut Sheet (up to 0.8 mm thick)
Paper
Instructions are not displayed if no paper is loaded.
Paper*2 Highlight the paper to be loaded and press the OK button. Follow the on-screen instructions to load the paper. If paper is already loaded in the printer, the instructions for removing the loaded paper type will be displayed before loading instructions are shown.
Poster Board Plain Paper Photo Paper Select Paper Type
Matte Paper
Select the type of paper loaded.
Others Custom Paper
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Select the name of the custom paper loaded in the printer.
Control Panel Specifications
33 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation Plain Paper Photo Paper
Select Reference Paper
Matte Paper
You can select the media type that is the closest to the paper you are using.
Others Paper
Custom Paper Setting
No Paper Selected
XXXXXXXXXXX (name of custom paper type)
Narrow Platen Gap
Standard Wide Wider
Detect Paper Thickness
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Select this option if you do not wish to specify the paper type. Select the platen gap, which is the distance between the print head and the paper. Normally, select Standard. Select a wider setting if printed images are smeared. If, upon performing head alignment, you feel that it is still not completely aligned, select Narrow.
Press the OK button to print a pattern to determine the thickness of the current paper. Select the pattern number with the least misalignment from the print results.
Control Panel Specifications
34 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation Pattern
Paper Feed Adjust
Paper
Custom Paper Setting
Value
XXXXXXXXXXX (name of custom paper type)
After the adjustment pattern is printed, the length of the pattern will be displayed in the control panel. Press the []/[] buttons to enter the measured value and press the OK button. Value selected Choose an adjustment between -0.70 and +0.70%. Selecting too small a value causes dark bands; adjust the amount upward. Similarly, choosing too large a value causes white bands; adjust the amount downward.
Paper Suction
-4 to 0
Normal Roll Paper Tension
High Extra High
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Use this setting if you are unable to resolve banding issues (horizontal striped lines or uneven colors) in the standard print area (for cut sheets the area excluding the 1 to 2 cm strip at the bottom of the paper) even after head cleaning or head alignment. Pattern selected Press the Z button to print an adjustment pattern. Measure the distance between the “+” symbols. Use only the distance between the center symbols or the average of the distances between the left, center, and right symbols.
It is important to choose the appropriate amount of suction for the paper used in order to maintain the correct distance between the paper and the print head. Choosing too high a value for thin or soft paper will increase the distance between the paper and the print head, causing print quality to decline or preventing the paper feeding correctly. In such cases, you will need to lower the paper suction. The suction power is weakened when the parameter is lowered. Select High or Extra High if the paper wrinkles during printing. If Extra High is set, the following setting is enabled: Setup menu > Advanced Settings > Roll Paper Tension.
Control Panel Specifications
35 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default) Remove Skew Custom Paper Setting
XXXXXXXXXXX Setting Name (name of custom paper type) Restore Settings
Print Paper List
Explanation ON OFF
Select whether to enable (On) or disable (Off) paper skew reduction.
Enter a name of up to 22 characters for custom paper settings. Choose an easy-to-remember name for quick selection. Yes No
Restore the selected custom paper settings to default values.
Press the OK button to print a list of custom paper settings. ON
Paper
Roll Paper Remaining
OFF
Select whether to display/record (On) or not to display/record (Off) the amount of remaining roll paper. If On is selected, you will be prompted to enter the length of the roll. The following options can be made available by entering the length of the loaded roll. Time until replacement When the roll is removed, a barcode will automatically be printed on the roll stating the length remaining, the value selected for the roll remaining alert, and the paper type. The barcode is automatically read and settings adjusted the next time the paper is used, improving efficiency when multiple rolls of paper are used. Printing Availability The printer will estimate printing availability based on the length of the roll. Displayed when On is selected for Roll Paper Remaining. Set within a range from 1 to 15 m to display a warning when the amount of remaining roll paper drops below that limit. You can set in 1 m increments.
Remaining Alert
1 to15 m
Nozzle Check
Press the OK button to print a nozzle check pattern. Inspect the pattern visually and perform head cleaning if you detect faint or missing colors.
Head Cleaning
Inspect the printed pattern and select the check boxes for patterns with faint or missing areas. To select all nozzles, place a check in the box on the left.
Maintenance
Auto (Uni-D) Head Alignment
Auto (Bi-D) Manual (Uni-D) Manual (Bi-D)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
If print results are grainy or out of focus, perform head alignment to realign the print head. If Auto is selected, the printer will scan the printed pattern during printing and realign the head automatically. If Manual is selected, a pattern will be printed; inspect the pattern visually and enter the value you think appropriate.
Control Panel Specifications
36 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Maintenance
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation -3 to 3mm
Replace Cutter
Moves the cutter to the replacement position so it can be replaced. Press the OK button to move the cutter to the replacement position. The paper must be removed before the cutter can be replaced. Remove the paper before proceeding.
Cutter Maintenance
ON Auto Cut
OFF
Cutting Mode
Normal Silent ON
Refresh Margin
OFF ON
Page Line
Setup
Printer Setup
You can fine tune the cut position when printing to roll paper with no margins in all directions. The cut position can be adjusted in increments of 0.2 mm.
Adjust Cut Position
OFF
Roll Paper Setup
Choose On to automatically cut roll paper using the built-in cutter as each page is printed or Off to disable auto paper cutting. The setting selected with the printer driver takes priority when the printer driver is used. If you want to reduce operation noise during cutting, set Silent. If Silent is set, the cutting speed is reduced. If On is selected during borderless printing, the printer will automatically trim the leading edge to remove any ink stains that may have been left by the previous copy; to disable this feature, choose Off. If Auto Cut is Off, you can choose to print (On) or not print (Off) cut lines on roll paper. Cut lines are not printed if Auto Cut is On or when cut sheets or poster board is used. Note, however, that if the roll width selected with the computer is narrower than the paper loaded in the printer, cut lines will be printed regardless of the option selected for Auto Cut. The setting selected with the printer driver takes priority when the printer driver is used.
Normal Top15mm/ Bottom15mm Roll Paper Margin
Top35mm/ Bottom15mm Top45mm/ Bottom15mm
When set to Normal, the top and bottom margins are 15 mm, and the left and right margins are 3 mm. Except for 15mm, the left and right margins for all other settings are 3 mm.
3 mm 15 mm Continue Roll End Option
Stop Printing
Select the action to perform for a roll after replacement: print the remaining data (Continue) / do not print (Stop Printing) / print again from the beginning (Reprint).
Reprint*3
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
37 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation ON
Auto Loading*1
OFF
Auto Roll 1 Roll Switch Setting*1 Roll 2
Normally, leave the setting at On. If you experience problems with automatic loading when you use commercially available paper because of lack of tension, slipperiness, extremely large curls, or other problems, set to Off. Remove all paper before configuring this setting. If paper is loaded, the setting cannot be changed. While the setting is Off, the Roll 2 unit cannot be used. Select the action to take when the roll currently in use is under the following conditions: automatically switch between Roll 1 and Roll 2 and print (Auto) / print fixed to Roll 1 (Roll 1)/print fixed to Roll 2 (Roll 2). The roll is finished, and there is data still to be printed. The printer predicts that there is not enough roll paper remaining, and printing cannot be completed. The print margin will be large for the width of the print job. When the setting is Auto, the roll is switched according to the Roll Switch Condition setting. Type Match
Setup
Printer Setup
Roll Paper Setup Paper Type
Disable
Print Length Roll Switch Condition*1
Remaining Amount
Paper Length Disable
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
From the following options, select the condition under which to switch to another roll for printing when the current roll has run out. Type Match: Switch to the other roll for printing only when the paper type specified in the job and the paper type of the other roll are the same. If a different type of paper has been loaded on the other roll, an error appears, and the printer cannot print. Disable: Print even when the paper type is different. From the following options, select the conditions when you want to switch in consideration of roll paper remaining and print length (length of one page of a print job). Note that if Roll Paper Remaining is Off in the Paper menu, this setting is disabled regardless of its configuration. Print Length: If both Roll 1 and Roll 2 have enough paper remaining for the print length, print using the roll with the lower remaining amount. If the remaining amount of one roll is shorter than the print length, print using the other roll. Remaining Amount: Print using the roll with the lower remaining amount regardless of the print length. Disable: Print using the roll currently in use regardless of the remaining amount or print length.
38 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation Best Fit Width Match
Paper Width Disable Roll Paper Setup
Roll Switch Condition*1 Roll In Use
Setup
Print Job Priority*3
Printer Setup
Roll Paper Tension
1 to 5
Advanced Settings ON Less Head Scuffing
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
OFF
In Order
From the following options, select the conditions when you want to use the roll paper that reduces print margins in consideration of roll paper width and print job length (the value of Document Size of the printer driver). Best Fit: Compare the roll width of Roll 1 and Roll 2 and the width of the print job, and then print using the roll with the smaller print margin. Width Match: Print using the roll with a width that matches the width of the print job. Disable: Print using the roll currently in use regardless of the roll paper width or print job width. Select the print job priority when there are several waiting jobs: print jobs that can be printed by the roll currently in use, switch to another roll, and then print the remaining jobs (Roll In Use) / Print jobs in the order they were received (In Order). When the setting is In Order, automatic roll switching operations may be frequent depending on the settings of the print jobs, and this may increase the overall print time.
This setting is used if one of the following settings are configured to Extra High: Paper menu > Custom Paper Setting > Roll Paper Tension or Printer driver's Paper Configuration > Roll Paper Tension. If wrinkles are formed on the paper during printing when the above mentioned Roll Paper Tension is High, set it to Extra High, and then configure the strength of the tension using this setting. Higher values produce higher tension. If the paper is thick, the print head may scuff the print surface. Choose On to prevent scuffing. This option can be used to temporarily change the value selected for Custom Paper Setting > Platen Gap in the Paper menu. Note, however, that On has no effect when Wider is selected for Platen Gap.
Control Panel Specifications
39 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Drying Time Per Page
Explanation
0 to 60 minutes
ON Paper Size Check
OFF ON
Paper Skew Check Advanced Settings Setup
ON
Printer Setup
Store Held Job*2*3
USB Timeout HP-GL/2 Settings
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
OFF
Quality
OFF
10 to 600 seconds Speed Fine
Specify how long the printer pauses to allow the ink to dry after printing each page; choose from values between 0 and 60 minutes. Depending on the ink density or paper type, the ink may take a while to dry. If the ink blurs on the paper, set a longer time for drying the ink. The longer the drying time, the more time required for printing. Choose whether the printer automatically detects (On) or does not detect (Off) the paper width. Try choosing Off if a paper setting error is displayed when the paper is correctly loaded. Note, however, that the printer may print outside the paper when Off is selected. If it prints beyond the edges of the paper, the inside of the printer becomes dirty with ink. We generally recommend to operate with this setting set to On. If On is selected, an error will be displayed in the control panel and printing will stop if the paper is skewed; select Off to disable this feature. On is recommended in most circumstances as skewed paper may cause the printer to jam. This setting is displayed if an optional hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit is connected. If On is selected, print jobs that require a paper type, source, or output paper size (width) that differs from those currently selected with the printer will be saved as held jobs; select Off to disable this feature. If Off is selected, an error will be displayed and will printing will stop if the source selected for the print job does not match that selected with the printer. When On is selected, printing will not stop if an error occurs; instead, jobs with nonmatching settings will be saved to the hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit as held jobs. Held jobs can be printed from the Print Queue menu after the printer has been readied by, for example, loading the correct type of paper. If printing stops mid-way when the printer and computer are connected by a USB cable, set a longer time. Choose Print Quality in view of image quality and print speed.
Control Panel Specifications
40 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation The hard clip area of the PS command of the data becomes the base output size. The actual output size depends on the Margin Options setting. When the data does not contain a PS command, the smallest rectangle area A of in the following illustration including the print object becomes the base output size.
Auto
Output Size Setup
Printer Setup
HP-GL/2 Settings
Choose the base output size from the compatible standard sizes. The actual output size depends on the Margin Options setting. A Series/US-ANSI/ For a cut sheet, this setting is available only when the data does not contain a PS US-ARCH/B Series/ command. Photo Series/Others If the data contains a command, this setting is not available, and the hard clip area of the PS command becomes the base output size.
User Defined
Select this option when outputting at non-standard sizes. After selecting this setting, set Paper Width and Paper Height. You can set in 0.1 mm increments. Paper Width SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series: 89* to 1118mm SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series: 89* to 914mm SC-T3200 series: 89* to 610mm Paper Height 127 to 4,620 mm The actual output size depends on the Margin Options setting. Note "*": The smallest size supported by the printer is 254 mm wide × 127 mm long. If a smaller size is entered for this setting, the document will print with wider-than-expected margins, which must be trimmed.
Margin
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
3mm 5mm
Select the top, bottom, left, and right margin values. For a cut sheet, the bottom margin is 14 mm regardless of the settings.
Control Panel Specifications
41 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation The position at which the margin is added depends on the Output Size setting, as shown below When set to Auto Adds the value selected for Margin (area B of in the following illustration) outside the hard clip area of the PS command of the data (area of A in the following illustration).
Setup
Printer Setup
HP-GL/2 Settings
Margin Options
Standard When set to a standard size or User Defined
Adds the value selected for Margin (area B of in the following illustration) inside the size selected for Output Size (area A of in the following illustration) and prints only the section within the area excluding the margins.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
42 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation The position at which the margin is added depends on the Output Size setting, as shown below. When set to Auto The result is the same as when Standard is selected. When set to a standard size or User Defined Adds the value selected for Margin (area B of in the following illustration) outside the size selected for Output Size (area A of in the following illustration). With the actual Output Size, the margin section becomes larger than the selected size (the area A of in the following illustration). Add Margins
Setup
Printer Setup
HP-GL/2 Settings
Margin Options
Depending on the Output Size setting, adds the value selected for Margin (area of in the following illustration) inside the hard clip area B of the PS command of the data or the size selected for Output Size (area A of in the following illustration). When there is a print object in the margin section, it is clipped and not printed.
Clip By Margins
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
43 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation 0 degree 90 degree 180 degree
Rotate
You can rotate the coordinates of the drawn data counterclockwise in units of 90 degree before printing. Note that objects drawn by RTL are not rotated. When both this setting and the RO command specify rotation, rotation is performed using the combined amount of both values. Note that rotation by the RO command is for objects only (the arrow section in the following illustration), and rotation is not performed for the drawn area (the square section in the following illustration). As a result, objects in a section that protrude from the drawn area are not printed.
270 degree
Setup
Printer Setup
HP-GL/2 Settings ON
Mirror
Select whether to flip horizontally (mirror) using the center of the Output Size width as the basis line and then print (On) or print without flipping horizontally (Off).
OFF
If an angle is specified for Rotate, the rotated result is flipped horizontally.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
44 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation Software Default Palette A
Select Palette Palette B
Palette A Setup
Printer Setup
HP-GL/2 Settings
Define Palette
Palette B
ON
Line Merge
You can define a unique built-in palette by specifying the pen width and color for the 16 types of logical pen. There are two types of definable built-in palettes: Palette A and Palette B. Select a palette to be defined, select Pen Number, and then define the Pen Width and Pen Color for each pen. For a sample of colors that correspond to the color numbers, see the included “Color Palette.pdf”. “Color Palette.pdf” recommends checking a print result that was printed with Print Quality set to CAD / Line Drawing (Color) in the included printer driver. Select whether to merge the intersection of the overlapping lines within the image according to the MC command of the data (On) / Move lines to be printed later to the front at intersections (Off).
OFF
Reset HP-GL/2 Settings
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
From the following selections, choose the palette that specifies the color and thickness of the logical pen. Software: Print according to the pen configurations set in the application, and ignore the built-in palette of the printer. Default: Print according to the settings of the built-in palette of the printer specified in advance. The settings of the palette cannot be changed. The built-in palette specifies a logical pen with a pen width of 0.35 mm and 256 colors. For a sample of colors that correspond to the color numbers, seethe included “Color Palette.pdf”. “Color Palette.pdf” recommends checking a print result that was printed with Print Quality set to CAD / Line Drawing (Color) in the included printer driver. Palette A/Palette B: The printer prints according to the settings of the built-in palette that you specified for Define Palette. If Define Palette setting is not set, the results are the same as when Default is selected. When Default/Palette A/Palette B is set, the pen configurations set in the application are ignored.
Yes No
If Yes is selected, the HP-GL/2 Settings are restored to default values.
Control Panel Specifications
45 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default) Printer Setup
Explanation Yes
Restore Settings
No
Version
The supported PostScript version and the latest version for processable PDF files are displayed. If the PDF version displayed in the document properties of the PDF file is the same or earlier than the version displayed here, the file can be processed.
PS Status Sheet
If the OK button is pressed, the information of the Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit is printed Auto A Series (A4)/USANSI/US-ARCH/B Series/Photo Series/ Others
Output Size Setup
User Defined Option Setup*4
If Yes is selected, the Printer Setup is restored to default values.
PS3 Expansion Unit
Select the size of the paper used for printing. When Auto is selected, the printer prints using the size of the printdata. The actual output size depends on the margin settings. When a standard size or User Defined is selected, all print data is enlarged or reduced to the selected paper size and then printed. The sizes that can be selected vary with the printer model. When print data is created with the paper size set to A4, the following settings have the described results. Auto: data is printed with margins added outside the A4 size. A4: data is printed with the A4 data reduced to the printable area of the A4 size.
Speed Normal
Quality
Choose Print Quality in view of image quality and print speed.
Fine Color Color Mode
Grayscale ON
Dot Correction
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
OFF
Specify whether to print in color or switch to black and white and then print. Depending on the paper type specified on the printer, the setting is not displayed. When you are using the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series, the setting depends on the paper type of the roll paper currently in use. This setting is displayed only when the paper type is set to Singleweight Matte Paper and Plain Paper. When you are using the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series, the setting depends on the paper type of the roll paper currently in use. If lines printed with CAD programs or similar programs have gaps or smudges, you may be able to reduce them by setting On.
Control Panel Specifications
46 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
CMYK Simulation
Explanation SWOP v2/US Web Uncoated v2/US Sheetfed Coated v2/US Sheetfed Uncoatedv2/Coated GRACoL 2006/SWOP Grade 3 Paper/SWOP Grade 5 Paper/ Coated FOGRA27/Web Coated FOGRA28/ Uncoated FOGRA29/Coated FOGRA39/ When you simulate CMYK ink colors of offset printers, you Euroscale Coated v2 /Euroscale Uncoated can select the color of the CMYK ink to be simulated. If Off is v2/JapanWebCoated (Ad)/ set, ink is not simulated. JapanColor2001Coated/ JapanColor2001Uncoated/ JapanColor2002Newspape/ JapanColor2003WebCoate/ EPSON_TOYO/EPSON_DIC/OFF sRGB Adobe RGB (1998) Apple RGB
RGB Source
ColorMatch RGB Setup
Option Setup*4
OFF
PS3 Expansion Unit
Absolute Relative Perceptual
Rendering Intent Saturation
Black Pt Compensation
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
When you will print RGB data, you can select the color space of the RGB to be simulated. If Off is set, ink is not simulated.
ON OFF
Select the conversion method (rendering intent) of color space when carrying out CMYK simulation or RGB simulation from the following four types. Absolute Colorimetric: Assigns absolute color gamut coordinates to the original and print data and converts the data. Color tone adjustment is not performed on any white point (or color temperature) for the original or print data. This setting is appropriate for when color accuracy is important, such as when printing logo colors. Relative Colorimetric: Converts the data so that a set of color gamut and white point (or color temperature) coordinates in the original data match their corresponding print coordinates. This feature is used for many types of color matching. Perceptual: Converts the data so that a more visually natural image is produced. This setting is appropriate for photo images. Saturation: Convert focusing on the vividness of color rather than color accuracy. Suitable for business graphics such as graphs and charts, for which the use of bright colors is preferred. When you have converted from a wide color space to narrow color space or you feel that the shadows are smudged, set to On.
Control Panel Specifications
47 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation ON
Auto Rotate
Option Setup*4
PS3 Expansion Unit
OFF
Caching To HDD
ON OFF ON
PS Error Sheet
OFF
Select whether to print a sheet with the error condition listed (On) or not to print (Off) when a PostScript error occurs during printing or an error occurs during printing of a PDF file. You can see the firmware version. When an optional auto take-up reel unit is connected, its firmware version is displayed below the firmware version of the printer. Furthermore, when an optional Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit is connected, its two control versions are displayed at the end.
xxxxxxx,x.xx,xxxx
Option Status
Lists the optional accessories currently connected to the printer and available for use.
Show Total Prints
XXXXXXm2
Print Status Sheet
Press the OK button to print a list of current printer settings. Choose this option to view settings at a glance. Auto
IP Address Setting
IPv6 Setting IPsec Setting
Panel Enable Disable Enable Disable
Network Setup IEEE802.1x Setting HTTPS Redirect Setting Print Status Sheet Restore Settings
Displays the total area of media printed (to a maximum of six digits). Select whether to use DHCP to set the IP address (Auto), or to set the address manually (Panel). Choose Panel to enter the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway. Contact your system administrator for detailed information. Select whether to enable or disable the IPv6 function. Select whether to enable or disable the IPsec function. Enter a Pre-Shared Key of up to 20 characters (half-width alphanumeric characters and symbols).
PSK Setting
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Normally, leave the setting at Off. If the print head stops frequently while waiting for data expansion during printing, set to On.
Firmware Version Printer Status
Setup
Select whether to rotate portrait print data 90 to the right automatically (On) or print without rotation (Off). Print data that was created in a landscape orientation is not automaticallyrotated even when this setting is On.
Enable Disable Enable Disable
Select whether to enable or disable the IEEE802.1X function. Select whether to enable or disable the function to auto-direct HTTP to HTTPS.
Press the OK button to print a list of the Network Setup. Use this information for a complete overview of network settings. Yes No
Select Yes to restore all Network Setup content to default values.
Control Panel Specifications
48 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default) Sleep Mode
Explanation 5 to 210 minutes OFF
Power Settings
Power Off Timer
1 to 24 hours Yes
Restore Settings
No
The printer will enter sleep mode if no errors have occurred, no print jobs have been received, and no actions are performed on the control panel for an extended period of time. This setting selects the amount of time until the printer enters sleep mode. The printer turns off automatically when there are no errors, no print jobs being received, and no control panel or other operations are performed for eight hours. The delay before the printer turns off can be selected from values between 1 and 24 hours in increments of 1 hour. Choose Off to prevent the printer turning off automatically. Select Yes to restore all Eco Settings to default values.
Japanese English French Italian German Language
Portuguese
Select the language used on the control panel's screen.
Spanish
Setup Preference
Dutch Russian Korean Chinese m
Unit: Length
ft/in ON
Alert Lamp Setting
OFF
Choose whether the large alert lamp lights (On) or does not light (Off) when an error occurs.
Enter an administrator password of up to 20 characters. Selecting Administrator Menu displays a password prompt. The Administrator Menu will only be displayed if the correct password is entered, preventing non-administrators from accidentally changing settings. Keep the password in a safe place. Should you forget the password, contact your dealer or Epson Support.
Change Password Administrator Menu
Password Required Operational Control Network Setup
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Select the unit of length which is displayed on the control panel's screen or printed on the patterns.
No Password Required
Choose whether the administrator password is required to access Network Setup from the control panel or Remote Manager.
Control Panel Specifications
49 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation
Power Cleaning
Inspect the printed pattern and select the check boxes for patterns with faint or missing areas. To select all nozzles, place a check in the box on the left. Yes Manage HDD*3 Setup
Format Hard Disk
No
Administrator Menu Auto Printer Mode
PostScript*3 HP-GL/2 YY/MM/DD HH:MM
Time Zone
Enter the difference between the current time zone and GMT. The selected time zone is used in e-mail notifications sent by Remote Manager when an error occurs and so on.
Reset All Settings Color/Grayscale
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Normally, leave the setting at Auto. Sent print data is identified, and the operation mode is switched automatically. If operation mode switching is not performed correctly, and printing is not performed correctly, set to the operation mode to be used.
Date And Time
Reset PS Settings*4
Enlarged Copy
If Yes is selected, an optional hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit that is connected to the printer is formatted. Formatting the hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit deletes all stored print jobs. Hard disk units or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Units that have been used with other printers must be formatted before they can be used with this printer.
Yes No Yes No Color Grayscale
Set the printer’s built-in clock. The time provided by the clock is used when printing logs and status sheets.
Select Yes to initialize the user font and user ICC profile saved in the user area of the Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit. Initialization deletes saved data. Select Yes to restore defaults for all settings except the Date And Time, Language, and Unit: Length options in the Setup menu. Choose whether to copy in color or in black and white.
Control Panel Specifications
50 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation With Border
A3->Auto,B4->Auto,A4->Auto, B5>Auto,A5->Auto,LTR->Auto, 4x6->Auto, Borderless A4/2->Banner(Auto)
Auto Enlarged Copy Other Size
Document Size
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Select the size of the original document when copying at other sizes. LTR, 4x6 The sizes available vary with the scanner.
Output Size
Choose the output size when copying at other sizes. A0, US E, B1, A1*, A0 (2Sheets) is available only with the SC-T3200 Series. US D, B2, US C, A2, A0 is available only with the SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T5200/SC-T5200D A0 (2Sheets) series. With Border
Border
Borderless Speed
Quality
Fine Five options from Light to Dark
Density
Roll 1 Roll Select
Scaling Large Copy / Large Scan
Copy Settings
Color/Grayscale
Document sizes are listed to the left of the arrows. The copy is enlarged to fit the width of the roll currently loaded in the printer. The maximum size is 914 mm (36 inches). If a roll wider than 36 inches is loaded in the SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series, the maximum size is still 36 inches. To print without borders, select Borderless. Note that this item is not displayed when a plain paper roll is loaded because Borderless is not supported. The sizes available vary with the scanner.
Roll 2 Manual
To print without borders, select Borderless. This item is not displayed when a plain paper roll is Borderless loaded because Borderless is not supported. Choose Copy Quality in view of image quality and print speed. Choose copy density. Choose whether to copy and print using Roll 1 or Roll 2. When roll paper that does not support large copy/large scan is loaded, this option is not displayed.
25 to 400%
Choose whether to set the copy scaling manually (Manual) or zoom automatically in accordance with the width of the loaded roll paper (Auto).
Color
Choose whether to copy a color document and print it with colors or in black and white.
Auto Grayscale Text/Line Drawing Tracing Paper
Document Type
Recycled Paper
Select the type in accordance with the loaded document.
Blueprint Poster
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
51 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default)
Explanation Auto
Width
ISO A, US-ANSI, US-ARCH, JIS B, ISO B cm
The default setting of Auto is recommended in most situations. Note that, depending on the document, it may not be possible to detect the width correctly even when the setting is Auto. In such cases, change from the standard size and specify a width of your choosing.
inch Speed Copy Settings
Large Copy / Large Scan
Quality
Fine
Choose the quality of copying and printing. Fine prioritizes quality so the print speed is slower. The selectable options vary with the Document Type setting.
Density
Level -3 to 3
Set the copy density. Negative values (-) are lighter, and positive values (+) is darker.
Contrast
Level -3 to 3
Set the contrast. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.
Background
Level -3 to 3
Set the adjustment value for the background. Configure this setting when you are copying documents with colors or documents that are thin, or when removing unwanted backgrounds. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.
Sharpness
Level -3 to 3
Set the sharpness. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.
Color
Choose whether to scan colored documents with colors or convert to black and white and then scan.
Color/Grayscale
Grayscale Text/Line Drawing Tracing Paper
Document Type
Recycled Paper
Select the type in accordance with the loaded document.
Blueprint Scan Setting*1
Poster Auto
Width
ISO A, US-ANSI, US-ARCH, JIS B, ISO B cm
The default setting of Auto is recommended in most situations. Note that, depending on the document, it may not be possible to detect the width correctly even when the setting is Auto. In such cases, change from the standard size and specify a width of your choosing.
inch
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
52 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 1-12. Menu List
Menu
Menu Item / Setting Value (Shaded one is the default) Save Image Type
Explanation JPEG PDF
Select the file format for scanned images. When Resolution is Direct Print (360dpi), only JPEG is available.
Direct Print (360dpi) 200 dpi Resolution
300 dpi 400 dpi
Choose the resolution for scanning. When Direct Print (360dpi) is selected, you can print scanned image files directly. If you choose a resolution other than Direct Print (360dpi), open Scan File Options, perform Send To Shared Folder, and print on a computer via an application.
600 dpi Large Copy / Large Scan
High Scan
Setting*1
File Size Compression
Normal
Choose the compression rate when saving scanned images.
Low
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Density
Level -3 to 3
Choose the density for scanning. Negative values (-) are lighter, and positive values (+) is darker.
Contrast
Level -3 to 3
Set the contrast. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.
Background
Level -3 to 3
Set the adjustment value for the background. Configure this setting when you are scanning documents with colors or documents that are thin, or when removing unwanted backgrounds. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.
Sharpness
Level -3 to 3
Set the sharpness. Negative values (-) are weaker, and positive values (+) are stronger.
Control Panel Specifications
53 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1.5.3 Serviceman Mode The Serviceman Mode is intended to be used by a service person for servicing the printer. HOW TO START & QUIT 1.
Turn the printer on by pressing the [Menu], [Back], and [OK] buttons together.
2.
Turn the printer off to quit the Serviceman Mode.
SERVICEMAN MODE MENU LIST Menu Class
1
2
Explanation
3
Paper
Adjusts the detection accuracy of the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR.
Rear AD
Adjusts the AD value of the PE Sensor.
CR Un Cap
Unlocks or re-locks the carriage and uncaps/re-caps the Print Head. Red
LCD RGB Check Mecha Adjustment
Green
Checks the operation of the LCD.
Blue Panel Check Sensor Check
Checks the operation of the buttons and the LEDs. ILS
PPK Sensor Check
Checks the operation of sensors.
WPPK Sensor Check WRoll Pull Out Sensor
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
54 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Menu Class
1
2
3
Explanation
PG-PGPG
PGtyp PG+ PG++ 400 CPS
Life
CR
H to F Speed
500 CPS 240 CPS
Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
400 CPS F to H Speed
500 CPS 240 CPS
Page Size Fan Life Count
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
55 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Menu Class
1
2
3
Explanation
Feed Amount 1 PS1 Feed Speed 1
PS2 PS3 PS4
Feed Amount 2 PS1
PF Feed Speed 2
PS2 PS3 PS4
Wait Fan Life Count Wait1
Life RLS
Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
Wait2 Life Count PG-PGPG
APG
PGtyp PG+ PG++
Wait Life Count Length Cutter
Return Length Wait Life Count
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
56 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Menu Class
1
2
3
Explanation
Feed Amount Roll LD
Feed Speed
KS2/KS3
Wait Life Count Direction
Roll RLS
CW/CCW
Wait 1 Wait 2 Life Count Feed Amount
Life WRoll LD
Feed Speed
WKS2/WKS3
Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
Wait Life Count Direction
Roll RLS
CW/CCW
Wait 1 Wait 2 Life Count
PP change Display Count
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Control Panel Specifications
57 Confidential
CHAPTER
2
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
2.1 Overview
2.1.1.3 Recurrence check of the trouble
This section explains the basic procedure for troubleshooting problems on the printer quickly and efficiently.
Check if the trouble the user claims recurs with the returned printer.
When carrying out the troubleshooting procedures, take a flexible measure following your sales company's policy and considering the troubling situation.
2.1.1 Preliminary Check Make sure to verify or perform the following basic items whenever servicing the printer.
Before troubleshooting, perform basic checks such as connection check of the power cable and installation check of the ink cartridges.
Check the user's usage environment. Temperature/humidity of the installation site (For the guaranteed environment, see P.13.) Drivers/RIP that the user uses
Genuine media or 3rd party's media?
Genuine ink or 3rd party's ink?
F/W version (the latest?)
Check also the following if necessary. Phenomenon
If 3rd party's media were used, check if the trouble recurs when a genuine medium is used.
If 3rd party's ink was used, perform the repair according to the policy of each local sales subsidiary.
If the F/W was not the latest, gain agreement with the user on the update of F/ W, and check if the trouble recurs when the latest F/W is used.
Download NVRAM and check the following with NVRAM Viewer. (For the check method, see P.298.)
2.1.1.2 Check for the usage environment
If RIP was used, check if the trouble recurs when the driver is used.
2.1.1.4 Check for the counter values/history
2.1.1.1 Before performing troubleshooting
Counter history of the periodic replacement parts. (if any part's life is near.)
Printer's operating history (if any cause for the trouble exists)
Error history (the frequency/history of errors related with the trouble)
2.1.1.5 Test print check For the trouble related with print quality, carry out “Test Print” and check the current adjustment status. (For the procedure of test print, see P.306.)
Check Item The installation site inclined? Any vibrating equipment near the site?
Bad print quality
The user's panel settings Is the interior dirty? Clean it if dirty.
Missing dots/bad print quality
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Near a conditioner's ventilation duct?
Overview
59 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
2.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure
2.1.3.2 If necessary to escalate the trouble case
Refer to the following items according to the observed symptom, carry out the corresponding troubleshooting following the procedures described in the next sections.
Make a report with the following data.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Trouble with a Maintenance Request or Service Call Error. (See P.61, P. 62) Trouble on print quality (See P.88) Trouble on paper feeding (See P.92) Other troubles (See P.93) Trouble on Service Program (See P.94) Trouble on NVRAM Viewer (See P.95)
2.1.3 Procedure after troubleshooting 2.1.3.1 If the trouble has been successfully solved
Check if the movement of the covers is normal (without any damage, noises). If any abnormality is found, lubricate or replace the faulty parts.
Carry out the cleaning after repair.
Prepare a report on the repair. (follow your company/local office's policy.)
Backed-up NVRAM data
Firmware version
Service program version
For bad print quality: a print sample with the marked symptom and a printed test pattern.
For faulty parts: the faulty parts themselves and a photos of the troubling section.
Information on the user/the repair listed below This is a format of the escalation report. At least check out the items on the list and register the case in the escalation system. • • • • • • • • • •
• • •
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Overview
Model name Serial number With or without options Content of the claim from the user Date of occurrence Trouble occurrence conditions/recurrence method What the service person actually observed (Check items before check, the content of troubleshooting and repair.) Date of escalation Purpose of escalation (Measures which the user/service person) Degree of urgency (S/A/B/C) S: High (those which may cause a death, ignition, etc.) A: Problems, bugs B: Strong request C: Inquiry Deadline for the response Repair history Part-replacement history
60 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests This section describes the remedies for maintenance requests. Maintenance requests do not effect the printer’s operation; therefore, you can continue the current printing. When a maintenance request error occurs, the printer displays on the LCD a hexadecimal code of “NNNN” which correspond to the bit numbers assigned to error statuses as shown in the table below. Table 2-1. List of the Maintenance Requests Bit assignment (Binary)
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
NNNN (Hexadecimal) 00000001 00000002 00000004 00000008 00000010 00000020 00000040
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00000080
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
00000100 00000200 00000400 00000800 00001000
Parts corresponding to the request INK TUBE Reserved Reserved RTC battery Reserved PUMP CAP UNIT Reserved IC HOLDER (Life of the pump in the ink path) RTC Reserved DAMPER KIT Reserved IC HOLDER (Life of waste ink pad)
Status End of the life
Out of battery Near the end of life Near the end of life Date/time not set Near the end of life Near the end of life
Note : Ex): When “Maintenance Request 00000108” is displayed. As “00000108” in hexadecimal means “0000000000000000100001000” in binary, you can find out the code is assigned to Bit-3 and Bit-8 referring to the above table. In this case, two errors are occurring simultaneously. (Bit-3: Out of battery/ Bit-8: the date/time not set.)
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedies for Maintenance Requests
61 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error The following tables explains the Service Call error messages and remedies. Table 2-2. Service Call Error Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
0001
EMG
NMI error
0002
EMG
System error
1101
INK TUBE
CR life error
CR scan pass counter has reached the specified value. (which means the INK TUBES have reached the end of their service life.)
CR HP detection error
The CR HP SENSOR cannot detect the CR UNIT. Or the CR UNIT cannot detect the touching surface for the home position setting, so the home position cannot be set. CR HP SENSOR failure False detection of the home due to paper jam or any other obstacle Misreading of CR SCALE CR Lock is damaged.
1125
CR
CPU detects NMI. ---
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Check Item
Remedy
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
Replace the INK TUBES (See P.189) and reset the counter of the INK TUBE (See P.307).
1. Replace the CR HP SENSOR. (See P.180) Is the CR HP SENSOR out of order? Does the light shielding 2. Re-install the CR ENCODER. plate react to the sensor? If it is faulty, replace it. (See Is there any paper jammed inside the printer? P.175) Does the CR SCALE have any scratches or dirt? 3. Clean the CR SCALE using ethanol. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Service Program. 4. Replace the CR SCALE. (See P.170) Does the CR Lock function normally? 5. Replace the CR Lock (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See P.184)
Connection failure of the CR MOTOR or the
CR ENCODER. The number of occurrences of overcurrent to
1138
1139
CR
CR
Over current error
Oscillation error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
the CR MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. Irregular load CR ENCODER failure CR MOTOR failure The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the CR MOTOR driver has shorted out.
1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections below? CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) 2. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Service Program.
1. Replace the CR ENCODER. (See P.175) 2. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See P.178)
1. Remove the foreign material. 1. Is the CR MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace 2. Is there any foreign materials around the CR MOTOR driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Remedies for Service Call Error
62 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Overcurrent to the CR MOTOR was detected. CR ENCODER cable is damaged.
113A
CR
Overload error
CR MOTOR cable is damaged. Irregular load CR ENCODER failure CR MOTOR failure
113B
113C
113D
113E
1. Check if the CR UNIT is attached correctly. 2. Is there any foreign materials on the CR UNIT drive path? 3. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections below? CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) 4. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Service Program.
Remedy 1. Re-install the CR UNIT. (See P.193) 2. Replace the CR ENCODER. (See P.175) 3. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See P.178)
Over speed error
The CR MOTOR was driven at a speed faster than a predetermined one during deceleration. Irregular load Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Service Program. CR ENCODER failure SUB BOARD is damaged. CR MOTOR driver failure
1. Replace the CR ENCODER. (See P.175) 2. Replace the SUB BOARD. (See P.148) 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the CR 1. Check the following connection and installation direction. MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) The polarity of CR ENCODER cable is CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) opposite. 2. Check if the tension of the CR TIMING BELT is proper. The polarity of CR MOTOR cable is opposite. 3. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Slipping of the teeth of CR TIMING BELT Service Program. CR ENCODER failure
1. Adjust the tension of the CR TIMING BELT. (See P.176) 2. Replace the CR ENCODER. (See P.175)
CR
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the CR MOTOR was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
CR
The CR MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Velocity deviation Irregular load CR ENCODER failure Service Program. error CR MOTOR failure SUB BOARD is damaged. CR MOTOR driver failure
CR
CR
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedies for Service Call Error
---
1. Replace the CR ENCODER. (See P.175) 2. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See P.178) 3. Replace the SUB BOARD. (See P.148) 4. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
63 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
113F
1229
Category
CR
PF
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Lock error
The CR MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally slower than a predetermined one during operation. CR ENCODER cable is damaged. CR MOTOR cable is damaged. Irregular load CR ENCODER failure CR MOTOR failure
1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections below? CR ENCODER to SUB BOARD (CN102) CR MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN19) 2. Check if the tension of the CR TIMING BELT is proper. 3. Does the CR ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Service Program.
Oscillation error
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the PF MOTOR driver has shorted out.
1. Remove the foreign material. 1. Is the PF MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace 2. Is there any foreign materials around the PF MOTOR driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
1. Replace the CR ENCODER. (See P.175) 2. Replace the CR MOTOR. (See P.178)
Overcurrent to the PF MOTOR was detected. PF ENCODER cable is damaged.
122A
PF
Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Service Program.
1. Replace the PF ENCODER. (See P.203) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Over speed error
The PF MOTOR was driven at a speed faster than a predetermined one during deceleration. PF irregular load Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Service Program. PF ENCODER failure SUB-B BOARD is damaged. PF MOTOR driver failure
1. Replace the PF ENCODER. (See P.203) 2. Replace the SUB-B BOARD. (See P.150) 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the PF MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. The polarity of PF ENCODER cable is opposite. The polarity of PF MOTOR cable is opposite. Slipping of the teeth of PF TIMING BELT PF ENCODER failure
1. Adjust the tension of the PF TIMING BELT. (See P.205) 2. Replace the PF ENCODER. (See P.203)
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the PF MOTOR was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
Overload error
PF MOTOR cable is damaged. Irregular load PF ENCODER failure PF MOTOR failure
122B
122C
122D
PF
PF
PF
TROUBLE SHOOTING
1. Check the following connection and installation direction. PF ENCODER to SUB-B BOARD (CN2) PF MOTOR to SUB-B BOARD (CN1) 2. Check if the tension of the PF TIMING BELT is proper. 3. Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the Service Program.
Remedies for Service Call Error
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
64 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
122E
Category
PF
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
The PF MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Velocity deviation Irregular load Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the error PF ENCODER failure Service Program. PF MOTOR failure SUB BOARD is damaged. PF MOTOR driver failure The PF MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally 1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the slower than a predetermined one during operation. connections below? PF ENCODER cable disconnection PF ENCODER to SUB-B BOARD (CN2) PF MOTOR cable disconnection PF MOTOR to SUB-B BOARD (CN1) Irregular load 2. Does the PF ENCODER work properly? Check it using the PF ENCODER failure Service Program. PF MOTOR failure
Remedy 1. Replace the PF ENCODER. (See P.203) 2. Replace the PF MOTOR. (See P.200) 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
1. Replace the PF ENCODER. (See P.203) 2. Replace the PF MOTOR. (See P.200)
PF
Lock error
131B
---
1. Turn the power off and then back on. Does the printer recover 1. Replace the HEAD FFC. (See Head driver from the error? P.163) The temperature of the Head driver rises, and has (transmission gate) reached a predetermined limit. 2. Is the FFC connected to the connector properly without being 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD. overheat error tilted? (See P.162)
1412
PUMP
Pump life error
The number of PUMP CAP UNIT operation has reached the specified limit. (The rotation of the pump motor has reached the specified limit.)
1416
PUMP
Undetermined position error
PUMP CAP UNIT failure
122F
--Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connection below? PUMP CAP UNIT to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
Replace the PUMP CAP UNIT (See P.184), and reset its counter (See P.307). Replace the PUMP CAP UNIT (See P.184).
Connection failure of the pump motor or the
pump motor encoder. The number of occurrences of overcurrent to
1418
1419
PUMP
PUMP
Overcurrent error
Oscillation error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
the pump motor has reached a predetermined limit. Irregular load pump motor encoder failure pump motor failure The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the pump motor driver has shorted out.
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the pump motor encoder below? and pump motor (PUMP CAP Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD UNIT). (See P.184) (CN14).
1. Remove the foreign material. 1. Is the pump motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace 2. Is there any foreign materials around the pump motor driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Remedies for Service Call Error
65 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
141A
141B
141C
141D
141E
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Overload error
Overcurrent to the pump motor was detected. Pump motor encoder cable disconnection Pump motor cable disconnection Irregular load Pump motor encoder failure Pump motor failure
Over speed error
The pump motor was driven at a speed faster than a predetermined one during deceleration. Irregular load Pump motor encoder failure Pump motor driver failure
PUMP
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the pump Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections motor has reached a predetermined limit. below? Replace the pump motor encoder The polarity of pump motor encoder cable is (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See P.184) Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD opposite. (CN14) The polarity of pump motor cable is opposite.
PUMP
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the pump motor was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
PUMP
The pump motor was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Velocity deviation Irregular load error Pump motor encoder failure Pump motor failure Pump motor driver failure
PUMP
PUMP
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the pump motor encoder below? and pump motor (PUMP CAP Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD UNIT). (See P.184) (CN14)
---
1. Replace the pump motor encoder (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See P.184) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the pump motor encoder and pump motor (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See P.184) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
141F
PUMP
Lock error
The pump motor was driven at a speed abnormally slower than a predetermined one during operation. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the pump motor encoder below? Irregular load and pump motor (PUMP CAP Pump motor (pump motor encoder) to MAIN BOARD UNIT). (See P.184) Pump motor encoder failure (CN14) Pump motor failure
1430
Holder Ink Pad
Life of the Holder Ink Pad (IC HOLDER life error)
The number of replacement counter of the ink cartridges has reached the specified life. (the life of the waste ink pad attached to the IC HOLDER)
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedies for Service Call Error
---
Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) and reset its counter (See P.307).
66 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
14B0
Life of the pump in Pump in the the ink path (IC ink path HOLDER life error)
The number of IC HOLDER operation has reached the specified limit. (The motion of the pump in the ink path has reached the specified limit.)
---
Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) and reset its counter (See P.307).
14C0
DAMPER KIT
The DAMPER KIT has reached its end of specified life.
---
Replace the DAMPER KIT (See P.156) and reset its counter (See P.307).
150C
1519
PG
APG
DAMPER KIT error
PG position undetectable error
When changing the PG, the PG SENSOR could not detect the PG position.
1. Replace the PG SENSOR. (See P.183) 1. Is the PG SENSOR out of order? Does the light shielding 2. Replace the APG UNIT. (See plate react to the sensor? P.181) 2. Do the planetary gearing work normally? (Do the planet gears 3. Remove any obstacles around and outer gears properly engage with each other?) the CR UNIT home position. 3. Is the CR UNIT out of its home position? (Do the planet gears The printer changes the PG with and outer gears properly engage with each other?) the CR UNIT being at its home position.
Oscillation error
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the APG motor driver has shorted out.
1. Remove the foreign material. 1. Is the APG motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace 2. Is there any foreign materials around the APG motor driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Connection failure of the APG motor. Overcurrent to the APG motor was detected.
151A
APG
Overload error
APG motor cable is damaged. Irregular load APG encoder failure
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the APG UNIT. (See below? P.181) APG motor (APG encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
APG motor failure
151B
151C
APG
APG
Over speed error
The APG motor was driven at a speed faster than a predetermined one during deceleration. Irregular load APG encoder failure APG motor driver failure
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the APG motor has reached a predetermined limit. The polarity of APG motor cable is opposite. APG motor failure
TROUBLE SHOOTING
---
1. Replace APG UNIT. (See P.181) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections below? Replace APG UNIT. (See P.181) APG motor (APG encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
Remedies for Service Call Error
67 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code 151D
151E
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Detects that the driving period is irregularly long. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace APG UNIT. (See P.181) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
APG
Driving time-out error
APG
The APG motor was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Velocity deviation Irregular load error APG encoder failure APG motor failure APG motor driver failure Connection failure of the APG motor. The APG motor was driven at a speed
151F
APG
Lock error
abnormally slower than a predetermined one during operation. Irregular load APG encoder failure APG motor failure
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections below? Replace APG UNIT. (See P.181) APG motor (APG encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
Connection failure of the PE SENSOR (Roll
1523
1529
ROLL
ROLL
Roll sensor error
1. Is there any problems such as damaged cable or connection Paper). failures in the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper)? (CN17) The lever of the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper) does 2. Does the lever of the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper) move not work correctly or dropped off. correctly? PE SENSOR (Roll Paper) failure
Oscillation error
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR driver has shorted out.
Replace the PE SENSOR (Roll Paper). (See P.214)
1. Is the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR driver?
1. Remove the foreign material. 2. If the error still occurs, replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR (1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder) (CN15)
Replace the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.225)
Connection failure of the 1st PAPER FEED
MOTOR. Overcurrent to the1st PAPER FEED MOTOR
152A
ROLL
Overload error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
was detected. 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR cable is damaged. Irregular load 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
Remedies for Service Call Error
68 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
152B
152C
152D
152E
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Over speed error
The 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Irregular load 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
---
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. The polarity of 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR encoder cable is opposite. 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR (1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder) (CN15)
ROLL
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
ROLL
The1st PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Velocity deviation Irregular load error 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR failure 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Driver failure
ROLL
ROLL
Remedy 1. Replace the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.225) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Replace the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.225)
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.225) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Connection failure of the 1st PAPER FEED
MOTOR or the CR ENCODER. The 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a
152F
ROLL
1539
Driven roller
Lock error
Oscillation error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
speed abnormally slower than a predetermined one during operation. Irregular load 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR (1st PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN15).
1. Is the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver on the MAIN The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the BOARD damaged? PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver has shorted 2. Is there any foreign materials around the PRESSURE out. ROLLER MOTOR driver?
Remedies for Service Call Error
Replace the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.225)
1. Remove the foreign material. 2. If the error still occurs, replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
69 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Overload error
Overcurrent to the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR was detected. PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR cable is damaged. PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR cable is damaged. Irregular load PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder failure PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure
Over speed error
The PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR was driven at a speed faster than a predetermined one during deceleration. Irregular load PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR failure PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver failure
153C
Driven roller
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR has reached a Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections predetermined limit. below? The polarity of PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (PRESSURE ROLLER encoder cable is opposite. MOTOR encoder cable) to SUB-B BOARD (CN5) The polarity of PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR cable is opposite.
Replace the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder cable/ PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR. (See P.208)
153D
Driven roller
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Driven roller
The PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Irregular load Velocity deviation error PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder failure PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR driver failure
---
1. Replace the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder cable/PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR. (See P.208) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
153A
153B
153E
Driven roller
Driven roller
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections below? Replace the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR. (See P.208) PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR) to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
Remedies for Service Call Error
---
1. Replace the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR. (See P.210) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
70 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
153F
Category
Driven roller
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Lock error
Replace the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder cable/ PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR. (See P.208)
Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See P.232)
1540
Cutter
Cutter HP detection error
The home position of the Cutter is not detected. 1. Is there any paper jammed around the CUTTER UNIT? Operation failure due to paper jam Connection failure of the CUTTER HOME 2. Is there any problems such as damaged cable or connection POSITION SENSOR. failures in the CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR? (CN16) CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR failure CUTTER MOTOR failure
1541
Cutter
Cutter return error
Slipping of the teeth of the Cutter Timing Belt
The Cutter cannot return to its home position. CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR failure
1548
Cutter
Remedy
The PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally slower than a predetermined Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections one during operation. below? Irregular load PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (PRESSURE ROLLER PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR encoder MOTOR encoder cable) to SUB-B BOARD (CN5) failure PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR failure
Oscillation error
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the cutter motor driver has shorted out.
Is there any problems such as damaged cable or connection Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See failures in the CUTTER HOME POSITION SENSOR? (CN16) P.232) 1. Remove the foreign material. 1. Is the cutter motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace 2. Is there any foreign materials around the cutter motor driver? the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Connection between the SUB-B BOARD and
the MAIN BOARD has an abnormality. 1549
154A
Cutter
Cutter
Motor disconnection error
Overload error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The CUTTER UNIT operation is not detected.
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connection below? CUTTER MOTOR Assy cable is damaged. CUTTER MOTOR Assy to MAIN BOARD (CN4, CN301) CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure. CUTTER MOTOR failure Irregular load
Overcurrent to the CUTTER MOTOR was detected. CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER cable is damaged. CUTTER MOTOR cable is damaged. Irregular load CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure CUTTER MOTOR failure
Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See P.232)
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections below? Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See P.232) CUTTER MOTOR (CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER) to SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
Remedies for Service Call Error
71 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
154B
154C
154D
154E
154F
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Over speed error
The CUTTER MOTOR was driven at a speed faster than a predetermined one during deceleration. Irregular load CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure CUTTER MOTOR driver failure
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the CUTTER MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. The polarity of CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER cable is opposite. The polarity of CUTTER MOTOR cable is opposite.
Cutter
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the CUTTER MOTOR was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
Cutter
The CUTTER MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Velocity deviation Irregular load error CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure CUTTER MOTOR failure CUTTER MOTOR driver failure
Cutter
Cutter
Cutter
Lock error
The CUTTER MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally slower than a predetermined one during operation. Irregular load CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER failure CUTTER MOTOR failure
---
Remedy 1. Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See P.232) 2. Replace the SUB-B BOARD. (See P.150) 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections below? Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See P.232) CUTTER MOTOR (CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER) to SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See P.232) 2. Replace the SUB-B BOARD. (See P.150) 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections below? Replace the CUTTER UNIT. (See P.232) Cutter motor (CUTTER MOTOR ENCORDER) to SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
During detection of paper thickness, the
1551
Sensor
Paper Thickness Sensor error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
1. Check if the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR is secured thickness cannot be determined because the firmly. sensor is not stable due to vibration or the like. The PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR is 2. Check if the cable of the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR is damaged and cannot detect the paper thickness routed correctly and secured with hooks(CN16). correctly.
Remedies for Service Call Error
Replace the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR. (See P.217)
72 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code 1561
1599
Category ---
ATC
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Paper thickness at power-on error
1. Check if the paper with the thickness more than 2.2mm is loaded. At power-on, the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR detects more than 2.2mm paper thickness. 2. Check and adjust the position of PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR. (See P.346)
Oscillation error
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the ATC MOTOR driver has shorted out.
Remedy Replace the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR. (See P.217)
1. Remove the foreign material. 1. Is the ATC MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace 2. Is there any foreign materials around the ATC MOTOR the MAIN BOARD. (See driver? P.145)
Overcurrent to the ATC MOTOR was detected. ATC MOTOR cable disconnection.
159A
ATC
Overload error
Irregular load ATC MOTOR encoder failure
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See below? P.212) ATC MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
ATC MOTOR failure
159B
159C
159D
159E
Over speed error
The ATC MOTOR was driven at a speed faster than a predetermined one during deceleration. Irregular load ATC MOTOR encoder failure APG MOTOR driver failure
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the ATC MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. The polarity of ATC MOTOR cable is opposite. ATC MOTOR failure
ATC
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the ATC MOTOR was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
ATC
The ATC MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Velocity deviation Irregular load error ATC MOTOR encoder failure ATC MOTOR failure ATC MOTOR driver failure
ATC
ATC
TROUBLE SHOOTING
---
1. Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See P.212) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See below? P.212) ATC MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
Remedies for Service Call Error
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See P.212) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
73 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Connection failure of the ATC MOTOR. The ATC MOTOR was driven at a speed
159F
15B1
15B9
ATC
PPK
PPK
Lock error
abnormally slower than a predetermined one during operation. Irregular load ATC MOTOR encoder failure ATC MOTOR failure
Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connections Replace the ATC MOTOR. (See below? P.212) ATC MOTOR to MAIN BOARD (CN15)
ROLL Release error
When detecting the origin of the PPK, the status of 1. Replace the 1st PPK the sensor and the current PPK Unit’s position do 1. Check if any disconnection, damages or broken cables in the RELEASE SENSOR A or B. not match. (See P.228) 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A or B connection. Connection failure of the 1st PPK RELEASE 2. Replace the 1st PPK 2. Check if any disconnection, damage or broken cable in the 1st SENSOR A or B PPK RELEASE MOTOR. RELEASE MOTOR. (See 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A or B failure P.227) 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
Oscillation error
1. Remove the foreign material. 1. Is the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 1st PPK 2. If the error still occurs, replace RELEASE MOTOR driver has shorted out. the MAIN BOARD. (See 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 1st PPK RELEASE P.145) MOTOR driver? Connection failure of the 1st PPK RELEASE
MOTOR. Overcurrent to the 1st PPK RELEASE
15BA
15BB
PPK
PPK
Overload error
Over speed error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
MOTOR was detected. 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR cable is damaged. Irregular load 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR (1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder) to MAIN BORARD (CN15)
Replace the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.227)
---
1. Replace the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.227) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
The 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Irregular load 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver failure
Remedies for Service Call Error
74 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
15BC
15BD
15BE
15C1
15C9
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR has reached a Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections predetermined limit. below? The polarity of 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR is 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR (1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR opposite. Encoder) to MAIN BORARD (CN15) 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
Replace the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.227)
PPK
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
PPK
The 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Irregular load Velocity deviation error 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver failure
---
Replace the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.227)
PPK
WPPK
WPPK
WROLL release error
When detecting the origin of the 2nd PPK, the status of the sensor and the current PPK Unit’s position do not match. Connection failure of the 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A or B 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
1. Replace the 2nd PPK 1. Check if any disconnection, damages or broken cables in the RELEASE SENSOR A or B. 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A or B connection. (See P.228) 2. Check if any disconnection, damage or broken cable in the 2. Replace the 2nd PPK 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR. RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.227)
Oscillation error
The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver has shorted out.
1. Is the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver on the MAIN 1. Remove the foreign material. BOARD damaged? 2. If the error still occurs, replace 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 2nd PPK RELEASE the MAIN BOARD. (See MOTOR driver? P.145)
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedies for Service Call Error
75 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR (2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder) to SUB-C BOARD (CN4) SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
Replace the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.263)
Connection failure of the 2nd PPK RELEASE
MOTOR. Overcurrent to the 2nd PPK RELEASE
15CA
15CB
15CC
15CD
15CE
WPPK
Overload error
MOTOR was detected. 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR cable is damaged. Irregular load 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
Over speed error
The 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Irregular load 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
---
WPPK
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. The polarity of 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR cable is opposite. 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR (2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder) to SUB-C BOARD (CN4) SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
Replace the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.263)
WPPK
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
WPPK
The 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Velocity deviation Irregular load error 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR driver failure
---
1. Replace the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.263) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
WPPK
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedies for Service Call Error
1. Replace the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.263) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
76 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR (2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder) to SUB-C BOARD (CN4) SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
Replace the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR. (See P.263)
1. Is the 2nd ATC Motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 2nd ATC Motor driver?
1. Remove the foreign material. 2. If the error still occurs, replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 2nd ATC Motor to SUB-C BOARD (CN2) SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
Replace the 2nd ATC Motor. (See P.265)
Connection failure of the 2nd PPK RELEASE
MOTOR. The 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR was driven
15CF
15D9
WPPK
WATC
Lock error
Oscillation error
at a speed abnormally slower than a predetermined one during operation. Irregular load 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR Encoder failure 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR failure The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 2nd ATC Motor driver has shorted out. Overcurrent to the 2nd ATC Motor was detected. 2nd ATC Motor cable is damaged.
15DA
WATC
Overload error
Irregular load 2nd ATC Motor Encoder failure 2nd ATC Motor failure
15DB
15DC
15DD
Over speed error
The 2nd ATC Motor was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Irregular load 2nd ATC Motor Encoder failure 2nd ATC Motor failure
WATC
Reversing error
The number of occurrences of reversing the 2nd ATC Motor has reached a predetermined limit. The polarity of 2nd ATC Motor cable is opposite. 2nd ATC Motor failure
WATC
Driving time-out error
Abnormally-long driving duration of the 2nd ATC Motor was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
WATC
TROUBLE SHOOTING
---
1. Replace the 2nd ATC Motor. (See P.265) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 2nd ATC Motor to SUB-C BOARD (CN2) SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
Replace the 2nd ATC Motor. (See P.265)
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Remedies for Service Call Error
77 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
15DE
Category
WATC
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
The 2nd ATC Motor was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Velocity deviation Irregular load error 2nd ATC Motor Encoder failure 2nd ATC Motor failure 2nd ATC Motor driver failure
---
Remedy 1. Replace the 2nd ATC Motor. (See P.265) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Connection failure of the 2nd ATC Motor. The 2nd ATC Motor was driven at a speed
15DF
15E9
WATC
WROLL
Lock error
Oscillation error
abnormally slower than a predetermined one during operation. Irregular load 2nd ATC Motor Encoder failure 2nd ATC Motor failure The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR driver has shorted out.
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 2nd ATC Motor to SUB-C BOARD (CN2) SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
Replace the 2nd ATC Motor. (See P.265)
1. Is there any foreign materials around the C 2nd PAPER FEED 1. Remove the foreign material. MOTOR driver? 2. If the error still occurs, replace 2. Is there any foreign materials around the 2nd PAPER FEED the MAIN BOARD. (See MOTOR driver? P.145)
Connection failure of the 2nd PAPER FEED
MOTOR. Overcurrent to the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR
15EA
15EB
WROLL
WROLL
Overload error
Over speed error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections was detected. below? 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR cable is 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR (2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR damaged. Encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN3) Irregular load SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500) 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
The 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Irregular load 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
Remedies for Service Call Error
---
Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.262)
1. Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.262) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
78 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
The number of occurrences of reversing the 2nd
15EC
15ED
15EE
WROLL
Reversing error
PAPER FEED MOTOR has reached a predetermined limit. The polarity of 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR encoder cable is opposite. 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR (2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN3) SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
Abnormally-long driving duration of the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR was detected. Irregular load Firmware becomes out of control.
WROLL
Driving time-out error
WROLL
The 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at a speed abnormally faster than a predetermined one during acceleration or deceleration. Velocity deviation Irregular load error 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR failure 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR driver failure
Remedy
Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.262)
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.262) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Connection failure of the 2nd PAPER FEED
MOTOR. The 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR was driven at
15EF
1619
WROLL
---
Lock error
WROLL Unit connection error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
a speed abnormally slower than a predetermined one during operation. Irregular load 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder failure 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR failure
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connections below? 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR (2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR Encoder) to MAIN BOARD (CN3) SUB-C BOARD to MAIN BOARD (CN500)
When checking the connection of WROLL Unit, its connection cannot be confirmed. 1. Connection between the cables of the WROLL Unit and the Connection failure between cable of the SUB-C BOARD has an abnormality. WROLL Unit and the relay connector. Connection failure between the relay cable and 2. Connection between the cables of the WROLL Unit and the relay connectors has an abnormality. the MAIN BOARD. Connection failure between the cable of the 3. Connection between the relay cables and the MAIN BOARD WROLL Unit and the SUB-C BOARD. has an abnormality. MAIN BOARD failure SUB-C BOARD failure
Remedies for Service Call Error
Replace the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR. (See P.262)
1. Replace the cables of the WROLL Unit. 2. Replace the cable that connects the WROLL Unit and the MAINBOARD. 3. Replace the relay cable. (See P.145) 4. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145) 5. Replace the SUB-C BOARD. (See P.261)
79 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
1A23
1A26
Category
RTC
RTC
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Incorrect RTC data The various absolute time settings stored on the error NVRAM are abnormal.
RTC Access T/O error
The RTC circuit on the MAIN BOARD malfunctions.
The HEAD FFC is not connected correctly.
1A37
---
Thermistor error
A temperature out of a predetermined range
was detected by the Head thermistor. Head thermistor failure
1A38
Hardware
Transistor environmental temperature error
---
was detected by the Head thermistor.
to improper HEAD FFC connection such as connecting it at an angle. The drive circuit in the PRINT HEAD is damaged. The fuse of the MAIN BOARD has blown.
1A39
Hardware
Head error
1A41
---
Head rank ID input error
An invalid Head rank ID was written to the NVRAM.
Hardware
I2C communication error (Between elements on ASIC and MAIN)
An I2C communication error has occurred in the MAIN BOARD.
1. Turn the power off and remove the RTC backup battery. 2. After several seconds, re-attach the battery and turn the power back on. 3. Reset the date and time settings of the RTC using the Service Program. (See P.350)
1. Replace the HEAD FFC. (See P.163) Is the HEAD FFC connected properly without being connected at an angle and any abnormalities such as peeled terminals? 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD. (See P.162)
A temperature out of a predetermined range
Electric parts or components are damaged due
TROUBLE SHOOTING
---
Transistor failure
Connection failure of the HEAD FFC.
1A50
Reset the date and time settings of the RTC using the Service Program. (See P.350)
Remedy If the error still occurs after resetting the date and time, perform the followings. 1. Replace the RTC backup battery. 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Replace the PRINT HEAD. (See P.162)
1. Replace the HEAD FFC. (See P.163) Is the HEAD FFC connected properly without being connected 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD. at an angle and any abnormalities such as peeled terminals? (See P.162) 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145) Check the Head rank ID using the Service Program. (See P.326)
Rewrite the Head rank ID with a correct one. (Page 326)
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
Remedies for Service Call Error
80 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
An I2C communication error between the MAIN BOARD and SUB BOARD has occurred.
1. Replace the CR FFC between the MAIN BOARD and SUB Are the MAIN BOARD and SUB BOARD properly connected BOARD. (See P.169) to each other without any cable disconnection, FFCs being 2. Replace the SUB BOARD. (See connected at an angle, and any abnormalities such as peeled P.148) terminals? (CN100) 3. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145) Check if both two PCIe ports are used by the options.
1A51
Hardware
I2C communication error (Between elements on ASIC and SUB)
1A80
Hardware
Conflicting option error
The power is turned on with the two options inserted to both PCIe ports.
1A81
Hardware
IF Option Board voltage drop error
Power supply voltage on the HDD Option Board has dropped. Short circuit or damage of the HDD Option Board
---
Replace the HDD Option Unit.
1A82
Hardware
PS Option Board startup error
PS Option Board failure
---
Replace the PS Option Unit.
1A83
Hardware
PS Option Board connection error
Wrong operation (Example: When the printer is turned on, the PS Option Unit is removed without turning off the power.)
1A84
Hardware
PS Option Board voltage drop error
Power supply voltage on the PS Option Board has dropped. Short circuit or damage of the PS Option Board
---
Replace the PS Unit.
---
Replace the PS Unit.
Check the connection between the PS Option Unit and the MAIN BOARD.
Use only either of the two ports for an option at a time.
Turn the printer off, then connect the PS Option Unit again.
1A85
Hardware
PS Option Board FAN stop error
The FAN on the PS Option Board has stopped or does not operate. A foreign object has stuck in the BOARD BOX FAN. BOARD BOX FAN failure Connection failure
1A86
Hardware
PS Option Board HDD overcurrent error
PS Option Board failure
---
Replace the PS Unit.
1A87
Hardware
PS Option Board VBUS overcurrent PS Option Board failure error
---
Replace the PS Unit.
1A90
Hardware
Power FAN error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The PW FAN has stopped or does not operate. A foreign object has stuck in the PW FAN. PW FAN failure Connection failure
1. Check if something is stuck in the PW FAN. 2. Connect the PW FAN cable correctly.
Remedies for Service Call Error
1. Replace the PW FAN. (See P.235) 2. Check the connection between the BOARD BOX FAN and the MAIN BOARD (CN24).
81 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Check the resistance between terminals of “F4” fuse on the MAIN BOARD. MAIN BOARD
Check Position Check Posi-
CSIC control error.
1F80
CSIC control
CSIC error
The drive circuit damage in the Print Head was
caused by the 42V fuse blue out of the Main Board.
1. If the resistance value of “F4” on the MAIN BOARD is more than “1Ω”, -> The fuse has blown out. It is necessary to check whether the 1. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145) drive circuit in the PRINT HEAD has broken or not. 2. Replace the PRINT HEAD (See [Check method] P.162) Pull out the PRINT HEAD FFC from “CN101” on the MAIN 3. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See BOARD, then check the resistance value between “15th” pin P.185) and “19th” pin of the FFC terminal. -> more than “1MΩ”: Go to remedy “1”. -> less than “1MΩ”: Go to remedy “1” and “2”. HEAD FFC
15
C A U T IO N
19
• Be careful to handling of FFC. • Be careful to electrode measurement.
2. If the resistance value of “F4” on the MAIN BOARD is less than “1Ω”, -> The fuse has not blowing out. Go to remedy “3”.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedies for Service Call Error
82 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
1F81
CSIC control
1F82
CSIC control
1F83
CSIC control
1F84
CSIC control
1F85
CSIC control
1FB8
CSIC control
1FB9
CSIC control
1FBE
CSIC control
1FBF
CSIC control
Error Name CSIC error
CSIC error
CSIC error
CSIC error
CSIC error
CSIC error
CSIC error
CSIC error
CSIC error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Cause CSIC control error
CSIC control error
CSIC control error
CSIC control error
CSIC control error
CSIC control error
CSIC control error
CSIC control error
CSIC control error
Remedies for Service Call Error
Check Item
Remedy
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
83 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
1FC0
CSIC control
1FC1
CSIC control
1FC2
CSIC control
1FC3
CSIC control
Error Name CSIC error
CSIC error
CSIC error
CSIC error
Cause CSIC control error
CSIC control error
CSIC control error
CSIC control error
Check Item
Remedy
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the IC HOLDER. (See P.185) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
1. Replace the optional HDD Unit 2. Replace the whole printer
Running out of disk space of the controlled
domain for print job on the optional HDD Unit. Controlled domain Integration value of print jobs reached the full error maximum of the controlled domain on the optional HDD Unit.
1FE0
Storage control
1FE1
Storage control
Invalid lock
1FE2
Storage control
Device access error
1FE3
Storage control
Missing device
2000
Memory
NVRAM error
2001
Memory
FLASH ERROR
Optional HDD Unit failure Non-support HDD Unit was attached to the
Is the attached HDD Unit guaranteed product?
Optional HDD Unit failure
---
Connection failure of the optional HDD Unit Communication error between the optional
HDD Unit and the printer
Is there any problems such as damaged cable or connection failures in the optional HDD Unit?
NVRAM erase or write error has occurred. Failed mounting or damage of the FLASH
SDRAM error
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Writing to the SDRAM was attempted, but nothing could be written to it.
Remedies for Service Call Error
Turn the power off and then it back on after checking the connection of the optional HDD Unit. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
ROM Memory
Replace the optional HDD Unit
---
Access error to the FLASH ROM
2002
Replace the optional HDD Unit
printer
84 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code 2003
Category Memory
Error Name FLASH BOOT SUM CHECK error
Cause
Check Item
Installing the firmware has failed. The Flash ROM is out of order.
Remedy
---
1. Re-install the main firmware. (Page 305) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
200A
Memory
F/W load error
Reading / decompressing the firmware has failed.
---
1. Re-install the main firmware. (Page 305) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
200D
System
System interrupt A system failure such as CPU failure, or defective watchdog time-out cash has occurred. error
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
2030
System
Internal timeout error
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
SoC internal failure
Check if the Power cable is correctly connected.
1. Replace the PSH BOARD. (See P.151) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
3000
AC shut-off AC shut-off
The AC power has been shut off due to a power failure, unplugged, PSH BOARD failure, or MAIN BOARD failure or the like.
D184 D185
Debugging
Debugging error
Communication error of the SUB BOARD
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection below? MAIN BOARD to SUB BOARD (CN100)
Replace the SUB BOARD. (See P.148)
D8F4 D8F5
Debugging
Debugging error
Communication error of the SUB BOARD
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection below? MAIN BOARD to SUB BOARD (CN100)
Replace the SUB BOARD. (See P.148)
D231
Debugging
Debugging error
The program's image process error (May occur related to D8F4 or D8F5.)
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection below? MAIN BOARD to SUB BOARD (CN100)
Replace the SUB BOARD. (See P.148)
S241
Debugging
Debugging error
The program's image process error
Is there any problem such as damaged cable in the connection below? MAIN BOARD to SUB BOARD (CN100)
Replace the SUB BOARD. (See P.148)
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedies for Service Call Error
85 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Dxxy
Debugging
Service call for FW debugging
This error is intended to be used in the product development stage. It is supposed to not occur to marketed products, but may occur due to an unexpected cause such as external noises.
Fxxx
CPU
CPU related service call
There is something wrong with the firmware.
Turn the power off and then turn it back on. Does the printer recover from the error? (No repair work is needed unless the error occurs again.)
Is the firmware installed correct one for the printer?
Remedy 1. Re-install the main firmware. (Page 305) 2. Replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145) 3. If not improved, escalate the case with the information in “Info1~Info3” displayed on the call window. &DOO)RU6HUYLFH 1RWHWKHIROORZLQJDQG FDOOIRUVHUYLFH &RGH1111 ,QIR11111111 ,QIR11111111 ,QIR11111111
1. Check the PRESSURE MOTOR operation (After removing the RIGHT LOWER COVER, check whether the piston included in the IC HOLDER is moving or not during the initialization)
1620
Pressure motor
Pressurizing initialization error
Check the piston movement from this hole.
The initialization process did not complete within a predetermined time period.
1. Replace the pressure unit (IC HOLDER). (See P.185) 2. If the error still occurs, replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
2. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connection below? IC HOLDER to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedies for Service Call Error
86 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 2-2. Service Call Error
Code
Category
Error Name
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
Pressure motor
Pressurizing/ Suction switching error
1. Check the PRESSURE MOTOR operation (After removing the RIGHT LOWER COVER, check whether the piston included in the IC HOLDER is moving or not during the initialization) (See item for SC1620) 2. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connection below? IC HOLDER to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
1. Replace the pressure unit (IC HOLDER). (See P.185) 2. If the error still occurs, replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
1622
Pressure motor
1. Check the PRESSURE MOTOR operation (After removing the RIGHT LOWER COVER, check whether the piston included in the IC HOLDER is moving or not during the Operating time-out The switching operation did not complete within a initialization) (See item for SC1620) error predetermined time period. 2. Is there any problems such as damaged cable in the connection below? IC HOLDER to MAIN BOARD (CN14)
1. Replace the pressure unit (IC HOLDER). (See P.185) 2. If the error still occurs, replace the MAIN BOARD. (See P.145)
1623
Pressure motor
Continuous revolution error
1. Remove the foreign materials. 1. Is the pressure motor driver on the MAIN BOARD damaged? The control terminal (Vre terminal) of the pressure 2. If the error still occurs, replace 2. Is there any foreign materials around the pressure motor motor driver has shorted out. the MAIN BOARD. (See driver? P.145)
****
Sensor
Interlock switch communication error
Communication failure due to broken cables.
1621
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The pressurizing and suction processes did not complete within a predetermined time period.
1. Various Service Call Errors are displayed in turn inconsistently. (e.g.: 1138 => 1411 => 1418 => 150C, etc.) 2. Is the cable of the INTERLOCK SWITCH broken?
Remedies for Service Call Error
1. Replace the INTERLOCK SEITCH. (See P.143)
87 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
2.4 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles This section provides troubleshooting of print quality troubles classifying them by observed symptom. Before performing troubleshooting, refer to “Nozzle Check” (p328) and print nozzle check pattern. Examine the printed pattern, and if any missing segment is found, perform the PRINT HEAD cleaning. Table 2-3. Print Quality Troubles Symptom
The nozzles are still clogging after cleaning.
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
The Wiper is contaminated and wiping 1. Is the Wiper or Wiper Cleaner contaminated? the PRINT HEAD cannot be performed 2. Is the Wiper or Wiper Cleaner damaged? properly.
1. Clean the Wiper. 2. Replace the Wiper and Wiper Cleaner.
The Head Cap is contaminated.
Is the Cap contaminated?
1. Clean the Cap. 2. Replace the Cap (PUMP CAP UNIT). (See P.184)
There is some foreign material on the PRINT HEAD.
Is there any foreign materials on the PRINT HEAD?
Clean the PRINT HEAD.
There is something wrong in the pump tube and the cleaning (suctioning of ink) cannot be performed properly.
Is the pump tube being bent or getting caught between surrounding parts or components?
Route the pump tube correctly.
The ink is leaking.
Is there any ink leakage observed on the ink flow paths?
If any leakage is found, correct it.
There is air inside the ink path.
Is there any air bubbles observed in the ink flow paths?
Run a head cleaning. (Page 329)
The HEAD FFC is not connected correctly.
1. Reconnect the HEAD FFC. Is the HEAD FFC connected properly without being connected at an angle and any abnormalities such as peeled 2. If the trouble still occurs, the cause may be breaking of the HEAD FFC. Replace the HEAD terminals? FFC. (See P.163)
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the following parts one by one. PRINT HEAD (See P.162) MAIN BOARD (The fuse may have blown) (See P.145)
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedies for Print Quality Troubles
88 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 2-3. Print Quality Troubles Symptom
Cause
Check Item
Adjustment failure of the IM SENSOR
---
IM SENSOR is out of order.
Does the IM SENSOR function normally? Check it using the Service Program.
Replace the IM SENSOR. (See P.196)
The PRINT HEAD has not been adjusted properly.
Have the following adjustments been made properly? Head inclination auto adjustment (CR direction) Head slant auto adjustment (PF direction)
Carry out the adjustments correctly. Head inclination adjustment (CR direction) (Page 330) Head slant adjustment (PF direction) (Page 333)
Improper PG adjustment
1. Is the paper thickness setting correct? 2. Has the PG adjustment been made properly?
1. Correct the paper thickness setting. 2. Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 322)
Horizontal or vertical lines look misaligned.
The PRINT HEAD has not been adjusted properly.
The paper was not fed properly.
---
Carry out the following adjustments. Head inclination adjustment (CR direction) (Page 330) Head slant adjustment (PF direction) (Page 333)
---
Carry out the following adjustment. Media Feed Auto Adjustment Check the following settings. Feed Adjustment Media Tension
Bandings in the paper feeding direction.
PF SCALE or PF ENCODER failure
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedy Carry out the following adjustments. Auto Bi-D adjustment (Page 319) Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment (Page 315)
1. Is the PF SCALE damaged or contaminated? 2. Is the PF SCALE attached properly? 3. Is the PF ENCODER installed correctly?
1. Clean the PF SCALE. 2. Reinstall the PF SCALE and PF ENCODER. 3. Replace the PF SCALE (See P.202) and PF ENCODER (See P.203).
The tension of the PF TIMING BELT is not proper.
---
Correct the tension of the PF TIMING BELT. (Page 340)
PF MOTOR failure
---
Replace the PF MOTOR. (See P.200)
Remedies for Print Quality Troubles
89 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 2-3. Print Quality Troubles Symptom
Cause
Check Item
Adjustment failure of the IM SENSOR
Bandings in the carriage movement direction.
Improper PG adjustment
1. Is the paper thickness setting correct? 2. Has the PG adjustment been made properly?
1. Correct the paper thickness setting. 2. Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 322)
CR SCALE or CR ENCODER failure
1. Is the CR SCALE damaged or contaminated? 2. Is the CR SCALE attached properly? 3. Is the CR ENCODER installed correctly?
1. Clean the CR SCALE. 2. Reinstall the CR SCALE and CR ENCODER. 3. Replace the CR SCALE (See P.170) and CR ENCODER (See P.175).
The tension of the CR TIMING BELT is not proper. Suction setting failure SUCTION FAN failure
Lubrication on the CR moving parts is insufficient.
Printed side is smudged or smeared with ink.
The backside of paper is smudged or smeared with ink.
---
Correct the tension of the CR TIMING BELT. (Page 311)
1. Is there any slack in the loaded paper? 2. Does the SUCTION FAN work normally? Check it using the Service Program.
1. Make the suction setting properly. 2. Replace the SUCTION FAN. (See P.237)
Has the oil pad of the CR UNIT dried out?
If the pad is dry, lubricate it. (See P.369)
1. Is the paper wrinkled, bent, rippled, or warped? There is a problem with the paper used. 2. Is the paper too thick and contacting with the head? 3. Is the paper too thin and loosening when being fed?
1. Replace the paper with a new proper one. 2. Adjust the PG setting according to the paper thickness.
Improper PG adjustment
Has the PG adjustment been made properly?
Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 322)
The PF (Paper Feed) Roller is contaminated
Is the PF roller smudged or smeared with ink or anything?
Clean the roller. Print some blank pages to clean it.
The platen is contaminated.
1. Is the platen contaminated with ink? 2. Is the Paper Size Check function enabled?
1. Clean the platen. 2. Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Size Check function.
Suction Fan is making the ink mists drift to the back of the printing paper.
Is the suction level of the fan proper?
Change the suction level appropriately.
The ink in the ink cartridge is not Color or print density unevenness within a agitated enough. page or across pages. Deterioration of ink quality Improper PG adjustment
TROUBLE SHOOTING
---
Remedy Carry out the following adjustments. Auto Bi-D adjustment (Page 319) Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment (Page 315)
---
Shake the ink cartridges so that ink droplets spread evenly inside the cartridges.
Have the installed ink cartridges expired?
Replace the expired ink cartridges with new ones.
Has the PG adjustment been made properly?
Perform the PG adjustment. (Page 322)
Remedies for Print Quality Troubles
90 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 2-3. Print Quality Troubles Symptom Blurred print
Paper dust is attached or the traces of the rollers appear.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Cause
Check Item
Too much ink discharge.
Has the Head rank ID been written correctly?
Traces of Pressure Roller are caused because the paper had been kept set in the printer for a long time. The paper dust attached on the PF rollers transferred to the paper.
--Is there any paper dust attached to the PF rollers?
Remedies for Print Quality Troubles
Remedy Rewrite the Head rank ID with a correct one. (Page 326) Remove the paper if the printer is left for a long time. Clean the rollers. Print some blank pages to clean them.
91 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
2.5 Trouble on Paper Feeding This section describes the possible troubles on paper feeding and their causes and remedies. Table 2-4. Trouble on Paper Feeding Symptom
Cause
Check Item
Improper PE SENSOR adjustment Paper is not fed into the printer properly.
Paper feeding or paper ejecting is abnormal.
---
PE SENSOR failure
Replace the PE SENSOR. (See P.214)
PF SCALE or PF ENCODER failure
1. Is the PF SCALE damaged or contaminated? 2. Is the PF SCALE attached properly? 3. Is the PF ENCODER installed correctly?
1. Clean the PF SCALE. 2. Reinstall the PF SCALE and PF ENCODER. 3. Replace the PF SCALE (See P.202) and PF ENCODER (See P.203).
The tension of the PF TIMING BELT is not proper.
SUCTION FAN failure
PF rollers failure
Actual margins differ from the specified margins.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Perform the Rear AD Adjustment. (Page 348)
Does the PE SENSOR work normally? Check it using the Service Program.
Suction setting failure
Paper is skewing.
Remedy
---
Correct the tension of the PF TIMING BELT. (Page 340)
1. Is the suction setting proper? 2. Does the SUCTION FAN work normally? Check it using the Service Program.
1. Make the suction setting properly. 2. Replace the SUCTION FAN.
Are the PF rollers contaminated or damaged?
Clean the rollers or replace them.
The Paper Skew Check function has been disabled.
---
Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Skew Check function.
The Paper Size Check function has been disabled.
---
Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Size Check function.
Does the PW SENSOR work normally? Check it using the Replace the PW SENSOR. (See P.198) Service Program.
The PW SENSOR is not working. Roll paper edge is attached to the takeup reel at an angle.
---
Attach the paper to the take-up reel correctly.
The paper hold-down plate is pressing paper too strong.
---
Align the holes on the plate with the edges of paper.
Paper feed amount is not configured correctly.
---
Perform the Media Feed Auto Adjustment. (Page 343)
The Paper Size Check function has been disabled.
---
Enable (select “ON”) the Paper Size Check function. (The printer is not capable of precisely correcting less than 2 mm differences.)
Trouble on Paper Feeding
92 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
2.6 Other Troubles Table 2-5. Other Troubles Symptom
The printer is not powered.
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
The power cable is unplugged
Is the power plug connected properly?
Connect it properly.
The power voltage is unstable.
Is the electrical outlet overloaded sharing with any other electric equipment?
Use one electrical outlet for the printer only if possible.
Connection failure of the PSH BOARD
Is there any problems in the connection between the PSH BOARD and the MAIN BOARD?
Correct the problem.
Connection failure of the PANEL BOARD
Is there any problems in the connection between the PANEL BOARD and the MAIN BOARD?
Correct the problem.
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the following parts one by one. AC inlet PSH BOARD (See P.151) A wrong type of network cable is used. Is a crossing cable used as the network cable?
Replace the cable with a straight cable.
Network cable failure
Is there any abnormalities observed on the cable? Are the connectors firmly inserted? Correct the problem. Is the cable breaking? Is the cable being bent or is there anything placed on the cable?
LAN connector failure
Is the connector deformed or damaged?
Cannot access to the network.
The MAC address is invalid.
---
Replace the MAIN BOARD. Rewrite the address with a correct one. (Page 351)
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the MAIN-C BOARD. (See P.148) The tension of the CR TIMING BELT is not proper. Lubrication of the CR UNIT and CR shaft is insufficient. The printer makes a strange noise when the CR is moving. CR SCALE or CR ENCODER failure
Unexpected tension was applied to the tubes.
---
Correct the tension of the CR TIMING BELT. (Page 311)
Does the CR UNIT move smoothly? Check it by pulling the CR TIMING BELT.
If the unit does not move smoothly, lubricate it.
1. Is the CR SCALE damaged or contaminated? 2. Is the CR SCALE attached properly? 3. Is the CR ENCODER installed correctly?
1. Clean the CR SCALE. 2. Reinstall the CR SCALE and CR ENCODER. 3. Replace the CR SCALE (See P.170) and CR ENCODER (See P.175).
Is the resin film on the CR FFC attached properly?
Attach the resin film properly.
If any of the remedies above does not help, replace the CR MOTOR. (See P.178)
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Other Troubles
93 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
2.7 Trouble on Service Program This section describes possible troubles on Service Program and their causes and remedies. Table 2-6. Troubles on Service Program Symptom
Service Program does not start
Cause
Check Item
Remedy
The operating system is not supported.
Are you running the program on the following operating systems? Supported OS: Windows XP SP3, Windows 7
Run the program on the supported operating systems.
The printer is not connected to the computer properly.
Is there any problem with the connection between the printer and computer?
Connect them properly.
There is something wrong with the program file.
Try with another computer. Does the program start normally?
If the program still does not start, the program files may be broken. Download the set of program files again.
Did you get the program through the official channel? Registration information of the program Check it with the license agreement displayed at the startis wrong. up screen.
Download the program file including security files through the official channel.
More than one printers are connected to Is there any printer connected to the USB port on the the computer. computer other than the one for adjustment?
Disconnect the printer which is not necessary for the adjustment.
The printer is turned off.
1. Is the printer powered on? 2. Is there any error occurring on the printer?
1. Turn the printer on. 2. Correct the printer errors.
After the USB ID is changed, the printer has not been reselected.
1. Is the printer powered on? 2. Is there any error occurring on the printer?
Select the printer (USB port) correctly.
MAC address cannot be set.
The printer is connected with a USB cable.
---
Connect the printer with a network cable.
“Remove paper” error
The selected adjustment does not require printing, but paper is loaded on the printer.
---
Remove the paper from the printer.
The printer does not react to the program command.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The printer is in a status that cannot
accept the program command.
Trouble on Service Program
94 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
2.8 Trouble on NVRAM Viewer This section describes possible troubles on NVRAM Viewer and their causes and remedies. Table 2-7. Trouble on NVRAM Viewer Symptom
Cause
Check Item
With a text editor, open the ini file (ServPrg.ini) in the Adjust the setting according to the policy of each “Common” folder of the Service Program, and check the local sales subsidiary. setting status of the NVRAM Viewer. (0 = Hide, 1 = Show)
The button to open the NVRAM Viewer is NVRAM Viewer function is set to not displayed. Hide.
The contents and the items displayed in the The Service Program you are running is NVRAM Viewer do not match with each Are you running the Service Program for this product? different one. other. History of the error and the counter reset are not displayed on the NVRAM Viewer.
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Remedy
History of the error and the counter reset are shown only as a CSV file. It will not be shown in the Viewer, because they have too many items.
---
Trouble on NVRAM Viewer
Use the proper Service Program for this product. Click the “Send as CSV” button on the lower right NVRAM Viewer screen to output the CSV file. These histories are recorded in this file.
95 Confidential
CHAPTER
3
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.1 Overview
3.1.1 Precautions
This chapter describes procedures for disassembling the main components of SCT7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series. Be sure to follow the steps when disassembling the unit. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure.
Before starting the disassembly or reassembly of the product, read the following precautions given under the headings “WARNING” and “CAUTION”. W A R N IN G
WARNING Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are described under the heading “WARNING”.
CAUTION “CAUTION” signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment. CHECK POINT Important tips for procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”. REASSEMBLY If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, the correct procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”. ADJUSTMENT Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described under the heading “ADJUSTMENT”. Be sure to perform the specified adjustments with reference to Chapter 4 “ADJUSTMENT”. LUBRICATION “LUBRICATION” signals that the part needs to be lubricated when replacing or maintaining it after disassembling. C H E C K P O IN T
The disassembly/assembly procedures are provided based on SCT7200/SC-T7200D series. The procedures for SC-T5200/SC-T3250/ SC-T5250D series are basically the same unless otherwise specified.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Overview
When the PRINTR COVER is opened, a safety-interlock mechanism causes the CR MOTOR and the PF MOTOR to stop. When the interlock function is disabled, be sure to take safety precautions and turn the function back to enabled after the operation. This printer is equipped with a lithium battery. When handling the lithium battery, the following precautions should be followed. • When replacing the battery, replace it only with a specified type of battery. Using a different type of battery may cause excess heat or explosion. Recommended battery: CR2032 (Sony) • Dispose of used batteries according to manufacture’s instructions and local regulations. Contact your local government agency for information about battery disposal and recycling. • When disposing of the battery, be sure to securely cover its (+) end with tape to prevent combustion or explosion. • Do not recharge the battery. • Do not use the battery if it is discolored or damaged, or if any leakage of electrolyte is observed. • Do not dismantle, solder or heat the battery. Doing so could result in leakage of electrolyte, heat generation, or explosion. • Do not heat the battery or dispose of it in fire. • If the electrolyte leaked from the battery contacts with your skin or gets into your eyes, rinse it off with clean water and see a doctor immediately.
97 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
W A R N IN G
Revision A
The power switch for this printer is installed on the secondary side of the power circuit; therefore, the power is always supplied unless the AC Cable is unplugged. To prevent electric shock and circuit damage during servicing, make sure to follow the instructions below. • Before removing a circuit board, make sure to unplug the AC Cable from the AC outlet and confirm the LEDs are turned off by pressing the Power button on the Operating Panel. This operation discharges the residual charge in the printer. • Make sure not to place the removed circuit boards on the metal and such directly. Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid injury from sharp metal edges. Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water immediately. If irritation occurs, contact a physician. If ink gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a doctor immediately. When replacing the MAIN BOARD, PSH BOARD, or Power harnesses and such, make sure to check visually if any harness is caught in between or any wrong connection exists.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
C A U T IO N
Overview
Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface. Use only recommended or s for disassembly, assembly or adjustment of the printer. Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified. Be careful not to soil the printer or the floor with the leaked ink when removing the ink-path-related components or parts. Spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the floor in advance. Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such as anti-static wrist straps. When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed, take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in moving parts. When you have to remove any parts or components that are provided as after-service-parts but are not described in this chapter, carefully observe how they are installed and make sure to remember it before removing them. Disassembling the frame and some components (platen, PF shaft) of the printer is prohibited because they are assembled with precise measurements in 1/100 mm unit at the factory.
98 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.1.2 Cautions after assembling C A U T IO N
3.1.3 Orientation Definition
The ink-path-related components or parts should be firmly and securely reinstalled on the printer to prevent the ink from leakage. When reassembling the printer, make sure to connect the connectors of the electric components or parts correctly and securely. Use extreme care when connecting FFCs (flexible flat cables). Improper connection of the FFCs, such as inserting them diagonally into the connectors, could cause shortcircuiting and lead to breakdown of the electric elements on the boards. When reassembling the printer, make sure to route the FFCs and other cables as specified in this chapter. Failure to do so may cause an unexpected contact of the cables with sharp metal edges, or lead to lower the noise immunity. When you removed any parts (especially cables) that are secured with acetate tape or two-sided tape, be sure to reinstall and secure them with the tape as exactly the same as they were.
The terms used for indicating the orientation/direction throughout this chapter are as follows. Up
Left Full side
Rear
Front Right Home side
Down
Figure 3-1. Orientation Definition
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Overview
99 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.1.4 Recommended Tools To protect this product from damage, use the tools indicated in the following table. For the tools required to perform the adjustment, refer to “Tools/Consumables for Adjustments” in Chapter 4. Table 3-1. Tools ・
Name
Description
4 cm or longer shaft length (The Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 one with a magnet is recommended)
Target Part PRINT HEAD Some encoders/sensors
25 cm or longer shaft length (The Phillips screwdriver, No. 2 one with a magnet is Parts in general recommended) Tweezers
Nothing in particular
Parts in general
Acetate tape
To secure the cable/harness, or for Parts in general (Use this tape the protection against the sharp when it is removed or when edge replacing the part) INKTUBE
Waste cloth
To prevent staining the printer with ink during operation
IC HOLDER DUMPER KIT PRINT HEAD PUMP CAP UNIT
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Overview
100 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.2 Parts Diagram PRINTER COVER (p. 126)
REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (p. 138) UPPER LEFT COVER (p. 134)
TOP COVER (p. 118)
LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER (p. 135)
REAR ROLL COVER FRAME (p. 139)
LEFT LOWER COVER (p. 132)
UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p. 127)
RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER (p. 128)
LEFT BASE COVER (p. 136)
REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER (p. 133)
FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER (p. 137)
LOWER PAPER GUIDE (p. 120) RIGHT LOWER COVER (p. 130) WASTE INK TANK COVER (p. 125)
LOWER PAPER GUIDE B (p. 121)
FRONT COVER (p. 119)
RIGHT BASE COVER (p. 131)
LOWER PAPER GUIDE B (p. 121)
LOWER PAPER GUIDE (p. 120)
WASTE INK TANK COVER (p. 125)
IH COVER (p. 122)
Figure 3-2. Housing
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Parts Diagram
101 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR (p. 142) Detects the Open/Closed status of the WASTE INK TANK COVER (L).
INTERLOCK SWITCH (p. 143) Detects the Open/Closed status of the PRINTER COVER. R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR (p. 141) Detects the Open/Closed status of the WASTE INK TANK COVER (R).
CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR (p. 140) Detects the Open/Closed status of the Cartridge Cover.
Figure 3-3. Cover sensors
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Parts Diagram
102 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
SUB-B BOARD (p. 150) Relays the connection between the MAIN BOARD and electric parts components. See “6.2 Connection Diagram (p375)” for specific connections to the concerning parts/components.
SUB BOARD (p. 148) Relays the connection between the MAIN BOARD and electric parts/components. See “6.2 Connection Diagram (p375)” for specific connections to the concerning parts/ components.
PANEL BOARD (p. 153)
MAIN BOARD (p. 145) • Communicates with the computer. • Processes received data. • Controls the printer mechanism. • Stores the correction values and various counters. BOARD BOX FAN (p. 234) Cools the air inside the Board Box.
PW FAN (p. 235) Cools the air inside the Board Box.
HDD FAN (p. 236) Cools the air inside the Board Box.
PSH BOARD (p. 151) Generates the DC voltage for this printer from the AC power supply.
Figure 3-4. Electric Circuit Components
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Parts Diagram
103 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
PW SENSOR (p. 198) Detects the width of paper on the platen. This is a reflective photo interrupter and detects the difference of the amount of reflection between paper (white) and the platen (black). IM SENSOR (p. 196) Reads print patterns in the following adjustments. •IMS position adjustment •Auto Bi-D adjustment •IMS inspection •Auto Uni-D adjustment •Head inclination adjustment •Roll paper remaining amount detection •Head slant adjustment •Auto PF adjustment •IMS sensitivity adjustment
DAMPER KIT (p. 156)
CR ENCODER (p. 175) Detects the pattern of the CR SCALE to control the position of the CR UNIT.
PG SENSOR (p. 183) Detects the origin position of the platen gap.
CR SCALE (p. 170)
HEAD FFC (p. 163) (x2)
PRINT HEAD (p. 162) CR TIMMING BELT (p. 176)
CR FFC (p. 169) CR COVER (p. 155)
CR UNIT (p. 193)
APG UNIT (p. 181)
CR MOTOR (p. 178) The motor to drive the CR UNIT.
CR HP SENSOR (p. 180) Detects the home position of the CR UNIT.
Figure 3-5. Carriage Mechanism
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Parts Diagram
104 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
PUMP CAP UNIT (p. 184) Includes the wiper section and the sucking section, and maintains the PRINT HEAD.
IC HOLDER (p. 185) Stores ink cartridges and includes the following mechanism and parts. •Pressure mechanism (Sensor/Motor) •Ink Level Sensor •CRCM Board
INK TUBE (p. 189)
Figure 3-6. Ink System Mechanism
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Parts Diagram
105 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
ATC MOTOR (p. 212) Feeds forward (normal rotation) and rewinds (reverse rotation) the roll paper to generate back tension. * ATC: Auto Tension Control
Revision A
PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT (p. 218) CUTTER UNIT (p. 232)
PRESSURE ROLLER (p. 207)
PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (p. 210) Detects nipping/releasing status of the PRESSURE ROLLER.
PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR (p. 217) Detects the thickness of roll paper being inserted into the printer.
PF TIMING BELT (p. 205)
PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER) (p. 214) Detects the roll paper and cut sheet. PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) (p. 215) Detects the thick paper. PF SCALE (p. 202) SUCTION FAN (p. 237) Sucks paper to the platen so as to stabilize the position of paper when printing.
PF ENCODER (p. 203) Detects the PF Scale patterns to control the paper feeding (operation of the PF MOTOR).
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (p. 208) Makes the PRESSURE ROLLER nip or release the media. PF MOTOR (p. 200) The motor to drive the Feed Roller.
Figure 3-7. Paper Feed Mechanism / Cutter
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Parts Diagram
106 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
1st PPK ROLLER ASSY (p. 223) UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p. 230)
1st PAPER GUIDE (p. 224)
1st PAPER FEED MOTOR (p. 225)
LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p. 231)
1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR (p. 227)
LEFT COVER (p256) 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B (p. 228) LEFT LOWER COVER (p256)
RIGHT REAR COVER (p. 259)
REAR FRAME (p. 251) FRONT FRAME (p. 250) RIGHT COVER (p257)
2nd PF SENSOR (p. 266)
RIGHT LOWER COVER (p257) 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR (p. 254)
Figure 3-8. Paper Feed Mechanism (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only) (1)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Parts Diagram
107 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE (p. 229)
REAR COVER (p. 221)
REAR COVER SENSOR (p. 222)
LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR (p. 252)
2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR (p. 262)
2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY (p. 260)
2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY (p. 271)
2nd ATC GEAR ASSY (p. 270) 2nd ATC MOTOR (p. 265)
RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR (p. 253) 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B (p. 267)
2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR (p. 268) 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR (p. 263)
SUB-C BOARD (p. 261)
Figure 3-9. Paper Feed Mechanism (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only) (2)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Parts Diagram
108 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
TAKE-UP REEL COVER (p. 238)
TAKE-UP REEL LED (p. 240)
TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH (p. 241) TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR (p. 239)
TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD (p. 243) TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD (p. 247)
TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR (p. 245)
Figure 3-10. Auto Take-up Reel
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Parts Diagram
109 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.3 Disassembly Flowchart HOUSING Start
“3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER (p134)”
“3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B (p121)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p127)”
“3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE (p120)”
“3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p153)”
“3.4.2.6 WASTE INK TANK COVER (p125)”
“3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p118)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p119)”
“3.4.2.7 PRINTER COVER (p126)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p127)”
“3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER (p128)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p119)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER (p135)”
“3.4.2.11 RIGHT BASE COVER (p131)”
“3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (p138)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p119)”
“3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER (p133)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE (p120)”
“3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN (p234)”
“3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p122)”
“3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B (p121)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER (p132)”
“3.4.2.20 CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR (p140)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p119)”
“3.4.2.16 LEFT BASE COVER (p136)”
“3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p122)”
“3.4.2.23 INTERLOCK SWITCH (p143)”
“3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER (p137)”
“3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE (p120)”
“3.4.2.22 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR (p142)”
“3.4.2.21 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR (p141)”
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly Flowchart
110 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT COMPONENTS / FANS Start
“3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER (p134)”
“3.4.7.4 SUCTION FAN (p237)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p127)”
“3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p153)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p127)”
“3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p153)”
“3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p118)”
“3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER (p128)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p119)”
“3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER (p133)”
“3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER (p135)”
“3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN (p234)”
“3.4.3.3 SUB-B BOARD (p150)”
“3.4.3.1 MAIN BOARD (p145)”
“3.4.7.2 PW FAN (p235)”
“3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER (p128)”
“3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit (p116)”
“3.4.7.3 HDD FAN (p236)”
“3.4.4.1 CR COVER (p155)”
“3.4.3.4 PSH BOARD (p151)”
“3.4.3.2 SUB BOARD (p148)”
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly Flowchart
111 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
CARRIAGE MECHANISM / INK SYSTEM MECHANISM Start
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p119)”
“3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER (p134)”
“3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER (p135)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p127)”
“3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER (p128)”
“3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p153)”
“3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit (p116)”
“3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p118)”
“3.4.4.1 CR COVER (p155)”
“3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER (p128)”
“3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT (p156)”
“3.4.4.6 CR SCALE (p170)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p119)”
“3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER (p133)”
“3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit (p116)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD (p162)”
“3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER (p133)”
“3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p122)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.4.10 CR HP SENSOR (p180)”
“3.4.4.11 APG UNIT (p181)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN (p234)”
“3.4.4.15 INK TUBE (p189)”
“3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p122)”
“3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit (p116)”
“3.4.4.11 APG UNIT (p181)”
“3.4.4.11 APG UNIT (p181)”
“3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC (p163)”
“3.4.5.13 REAR COVER (p221)”
“3.4.4.13 PUMP CAP UNIT (p184)”
“3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit (p116)”
“3.4.4.9 CR MOTOR (p178)”
“3.4.4.5 CR FFC (p169)”
“3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR (p222)”
“3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER (p135)”
“3.4.4.6 CR SCALE (p170)”
“3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (p138)”
“3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN (p234)”
“3.4.4.16 CR UNIT (p193)”
“3.4.4.9 CR MOTOR (p178)”
“3.4.4.7 CR ENCODER (p175)”
“3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE (p229)”
“3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p230)”
“3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p231)”
“3.4.4.14 IC HOLDER (p185)”
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly Flowchart
“3.4.4.12 PG SENSOR (p183)”
“3.4.4.17 IM SENSOR (p196)”
“3.4.4.8 CR TIMMING BELT (p176)”
“3.4.4.18 PW SENSOR (p198)”
112 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
PAPER FEED MECHANISM / CUTTER Start
“3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER (p134)”
“3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME (p139)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p127)”
“3.4.5.9 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER) (p214)”
“3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p153)”
“3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p118)”
“3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER (p128)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p119)”
“3.4.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER (p207)”
“3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER (p119)”
“3.4.5.8 ATC MOTOR (p212)”
“3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER (p135)”
“3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME (p139)”
“3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER (p135)”
“3.4.5.11 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR (p217)”
“3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (p138)”
“3.4.5.13 REAR COVER (p221)”
“3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER (p132)”
“3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER (p132)”
“3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR (p222)”
“3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER (p130)”
“3.4.5.3 PF ENCODER (p203)”
“3.4.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR (p208)”
“3.4.5.1 PF MOTOR (p200)”
“3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (p138)”
“3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER (p137)”
“3.4.5.2 PF SCALE (p202)”
“3.4.5.4 PF TIMING BELT (p205)”
“3.4.5.7 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (p210)”
“3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE (p229)”
“3.4.2.5 IH COVER (p122)”
“3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE (p120)”
“3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p231)”
“3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B (p121)”
“3.4.6.1 CUTTER UNIT (p232)”
“3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p230)”
“3.4.5.10 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) (p215)”
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly Flowchart
“3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT (p218)”
113 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
PAPER FEED MECHANISM (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D SERIES ONLY) Start
“3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER (p134)”
“3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR (p222)”
“3.4.5.13 REAR COVER (p221)”
“3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER (p127)”
“3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (p138)”
“3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p231)”
“3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD (p153)”
“3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE (p229)”
“3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR (p222)”
“3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (p138)”
“3.4.2.1 TOP COVER (p118)”
“3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE (p229)”
“3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER (p128)”
“3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p231)”
“3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER (p135)”
“3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME (p139)”
“3.4.5.19 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B (p228)”
“3.4.5.18 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR (p227)”
“3.4.5.15 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY (p223)”
“3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME (p139)”
“3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME (p139)”
“3.4.5.17 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR (p225)”
“3.4.5.19 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B (p228)”
“3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p230)”
“3.4.5.16 1st PAPER GUIDE (p224)”
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly Flowchart
114 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
AUTO TAKE-UP REEL (SC-T7200 SERIES ONLY) Start “3.4.8.1 TAKE-UP REEL COVER (p238)”
“3.4.8.2 TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR (p239)”
“3.4.8.3 TAKE-UP REEL LED (p240)”
“3.4.8.4 TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH (p241)”
“3.4.8.5 TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD (p243)”
“3.4.8.6 TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR (p245)”
“3.4.8.7 TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD (p247)”
2ND ROLL UNIT (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D SERIES ONLY) Start
“3.4.9.7 RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER (p257)”
“3.4.9.4 RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR (p253)”
“3.4.9.18 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY (p271)”
“3.4.9.13 2nd ATC MOTOR (p265)”
“3.4.9.5 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR (p254)”
“3.4.9.17 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY (p270)”
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
“3.4.9.2 REAR FRAME (p251)”
“3.4.9.6 LEFT COVER/LEFT LOWER COVER (p256)”
“3.4.9.1 FRONT FRAME (p250)”
“3.4.9.8 RIGHT REAR COVER (p259)”
“3.4.9.9 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY (p260)”
“3.4.9.3 LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR (p252)”
“3.4.9.7 RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER (p257)”
“3.4.9.15 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B (p267)”
“3.4.5.13 REAR COVER (p221)”
“3.4.9.10 SUB-C BOARD (p261)”
“3.4.9.2 REAR FRAME (p251)”
“3.4.9.12 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR (p263)”
“3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (p231)”
“3.4.9.8 RIGHT REAR COVER (p259)”
“3.4.9.16 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR (p268)”
“3.4.9.11 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR (p262)”
Disassembly Flowchart
“3.4.9.14 2nd PF SENSOR (p266)”
115 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure This section describes procedures for disassembling the components allowed to be disassembled. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure.
3.4.1 Preparation for servicing
Revision A Manual (1) 1.
Remove the screw, and remove the cover from the RIGHT UPPER COVER. A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with captive washer: 1 pcs
2.
Insert a screwdriver into the cover through the hole as shown in the figure.
3.
Turn the white shaft of the PUMP CAP UNIT counterclockwise with the driver until click sound when the CR is unlocked occurs.
3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit C A U T IO N
C A U T IO N
When you have unlocked the CR Unit and finished your reassembly work, move the CR Unit (Print Head) over the platen and turn the printer on to let it perform the initialization sequence. (By this sequence, the CR Unit is locked and Print Head is capped.) If the initialization is performed on or over the Cap, the Print Head may be damaged.
Cover
No clock rotation!
A
Automatic 1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu], [Back] and [OK] buttons together.
2.
Select Mecha Adjustment - CR Un Cap.
3.
Press the [OK] button while [Enter] Un Cap is displayed. The carriage unit is unlocked.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Figure 3-11. Unlocking the CR Unit (1) C A U T IO N
Do not turn the white shaft clockwise with the driver.
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
116 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Manual (2)
C A U T IO N
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Insert a screwdriver into the cover through the hole as shown in the figure.
7.
While viewing the CR Lock Lever status from the front of the printer, turn the white shaft of the Pump Cap Unit counterclockwise with the driver.
8.
The CR Lock Lever is lowered. Check that the lever reaches the CR unlock position, and stop turning the white shaft.
C A U T IO N
No clock rotation!
PUMP CAP UNIT
Screwdrive
Insert driver here
Do not turn the white shaft clockwise with the driver.
Figure 3-12. Unlocking the CR Unit (2) CR Lock Lever
C H E C K P O IN T
When the CR is unlocked, it clicks. Use a screwdriver with a 170 mm or longer shaft.
CR unlocked (The Lever is lowered)
CR locked (The lever is raised)
Figure 3-13. Status of the CR Lock Lever
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
117 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2 Housing Positioning point
3.4.2.1 TOP COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the screw, and remove the TOP COVER.
A
Upper Support Frame
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs 5.
TOP COVER
Remove the PRINTER COVER. (p126) Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-14).
Figure 3-14. Removing the TOP COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
118 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.2 FRONT COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Open the PRINTER COVER.
5.
Remove the seven screws, and remove the FRONT COVER.
PRINTER COVER
A
A
A
A
A
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 7 pcs To ensure the INTERLOCK SWITCH can detect the flag of PRINTER COVE, tighten the screws which secure the FRONT COVER while pulling the Front Frame toward you.
FRONT COVER
Figure 3-15. Removing the FRONT COVER
INTERLOCK SWITCH
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Front Frame
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
119 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.3 LOWER PAPER GUIDE 1.
Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p121)
2.
Open the WASTE INK TANK COVER.
3.
Remove the three screws, and remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE.
LOWER PAPER GUIDE
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
To ensure the tab of WASTE INK TANK COVER is inserted in the groove of the Sensor Frame, install the LOWER PAPER GUIDE with the WASTE INK TANK COVER opened. When installing the LOWER PAPER GUIDE, take care not to damage the L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR or R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR. Groove of the Sensor Frame
A
A
A L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
WASTE INK TANK COVER
Figure 3-16. Removing the LOWER PAPER GUIDE
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
120 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.4 LOWER PAPER GUIDE B 1.
Remove the two screws, and remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
A
A A
A
LOWER PAPER GUIDE B
Figure 3-17. Removing the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
121 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.5 IH COVER
10. Open the Cartridge Cover.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
11. Remove the four screws that secure the IH COVER.
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
8.
Release the cable from the four clamps.
9.
Disconnect the cable from the relay connector (No.1), and release the cable of the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs
IH COVER
A
A
A Clamps
A Cartridge Cover
Clamp
Figure 3-19. Removing the IH COVER Cable of the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
Relay Connector (No.1)
Figure 3-18. Releasing the Cable
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
122 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
C A U T IO N
Revision A
Do not take off the IH COVER strongly too far in the following steps because the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR is attached to the IH COVER.
CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR Cable
12. Pull out the IH COVER. When installing the IH COVER, insert the rib under the LOWER PAPER GUIDE.
Rib
IH COVER
IH COVER
LOWER PAPER GUIDE
Figure 3-20. Removing the IH COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
123 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
13. Disengage the two hooks that secure the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR, and remove the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR from the IH COVER. Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-21).
Inside of IH COVER
Hole CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
Positioning point
Hook
Positioning point
Figure 3-21. Removing the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
124 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.6 WASTE INK TANK COVER 1.
Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p121)
2.
Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE. (p120)
3.
Disengage the two hooks on the WASTE INK TANK COVER from the two shafts of the LOWER PAPER GUIDE using a tool such as a slotted-head screwdriver, then remove the WASTE INK TANK COVER.
LOWER PAPER GUIDE
WASTE INK TANK COVER
Shafts
Back side
Hooks
Figure 3-22. Removing the WASTE INK TANK COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
125 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.7 PRINTER COVER 1.
Disengage the three hinges of the PRINTER COVER from the bearings, and remove the PRINTER COVER.
Bearing Hinge
PRINTER COVER
Figure 3-23. Removing the PRINTER COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
126 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.8 UPPER SUPPORT R COVER 1.
Remove the two screws, and remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
UPPER SUPPORT R COVER
Pay attention to the positioning points. (See below figure) A Panel Housing
Positioning points A UPPER SUPPORT R COVER
RIGHT LOWER COVER
Figure 3-24. Removing the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER Positioning points
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
TOP COVER
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
127 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.9 RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the six screws, and remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER.
B
Positioning point
A
A) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs B) Silver M3x10 P-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs
RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER
C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs C H E C K P O IN T
If an optional MFP Scanner stand is installed, remove the screw shown below and remove it by separating the RIGHT UPPER COVER and RIGHT ROLL COVER. C RIGHT ROLL COVER
B
Screw RIGHT UPPER COVER IH COVER
C
C
Figure 3-25. Removing the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
128 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure, Figure 3-25). Inside Positioning points
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
RIGHT LOWER COVER
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
129 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.10 RIGHT LOWER COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the three screws, and remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER.
RIGHT LOWER COVER
B
A) Silver M3x10 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
B A
Insert the two tabs of the IH COVER to the two holes on the RIGHT LOWER COVER. Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure). IH COVER Tabs
Figure 3-26. Removing the RIGHT LOWER COVER
RIGHT BASE COVER
Positioning points
RIGHT LOWER COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
130 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.11 RIGHT BASE COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
7.
Remove the two screws, and remove the RIGHT BASE COVER.
RIGHT BASE COVER
A
A
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
RIGHT BASE COVER Positioning point
Positioning point
Figure 3-27. Removing the RIGHT BASE COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
131 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.12 LEFT LOWER COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the two screws, and LEFT LOWER COVER.
Upper side B
LEFT LOWER COVER
A) Silver M3x10 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs B) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
Insert the two tabs of the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER to the two holes on the LEFT LOWER COVER. Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure). FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER Tabs A LEFT BASE COVER
Figure 3-28. Removing the LEFT LOWER COVER Positioning points
LEFT LOWER COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
132 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.13 REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the three screws, and remove the Right Cap Cover.
Inner D B
B
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 3 pcs 7.
C
Remove the fourteen screws, and remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER.
B
B) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 9 pcs
C
C) Silver M3x6 machine screw: 4 pcs
C
B
D) Silver M3x20 Bind machine screw: 1 pcs
B
C B
A
B
B
B
Right Cap Cover
A
A
Figure 3-29. Removing the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
133 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.14 UPPER LEFT COVER 1.
Open the PRINTER COVER.
2.
Remove the five screws, and remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 5 pcs
A PRINTER COVER
UPPER LEFT COVER A A A A
Figure 3-30. Removing the UPPER LEFT COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
134 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.15 LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER C A U T IO N
If the optional Large Format Scanner Stand is attached, take care not to drop screws inside the stand because there are holes for accessing screws.
B
B
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the six screws, and remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER.
Positioning point
A LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER
A) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 4 pcs A) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure, Figure 3-31). A
Inside Positioning points
LEFT LOWER COVER
FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER
A
A
Figure 3-31. Removing the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
135 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.16 LEFT BASE COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
9.
Remove the two screws, and remove the LEFT BASE COVER.
LEFT BASE COVER
A
A
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
LEFT BASE COVER Positioning point
Figure 3-32. Removing the LEFT BASE COVER
Positioning point
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
136 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.17 FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
9.
Remove the four screws, and remove the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER.
FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER
Front side
Left side A Positioning points
A
A
A
Figure 3-33. Removing the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER Positioning points
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
137 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.18 REAR LEFT LOWER COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Loosen the screw that secures the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER.
REAR LEFT LOWER COVER
A
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs 8.
Remove the three screws, and remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. C
B) Silver M4x12 P-tite screw with washer: 1 pcs
B
C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs C
Figure 3-34. Removing the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
138 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.19 REAR ROLL COVER FRAME 1.
Remove the nine screws, and remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME.
Front side
A) Silver M4x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 6 pcs
B
B
B
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs Place the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME so that it will come on all the four tabs of the R Side Roll Frame and L Side Roll Frame. Back side REAR ROLL COVER FRAME
A
A
A
Tabs
R Side Roll Frame
A
L Side Roll Frame
Tabs
Figure 3-35. Removing the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
139 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.20 CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
8.
Remove the IH COVER. (p122)
9.
Release the cable from the four clamps.
Clamps
Relay Connector (No.1)
10. Disconnect the cable from the Relay Connector (No.1), and remove the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR. CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
Clamp
Figure 3-36. Removing the CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
140 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.21 R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR Right side
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133)
7.
Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE. (p120)
8.
Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p121)
9.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
Clamps
Maintenance Box Holder
Relay Connector (No.9) Clamp
Hooks
R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
10. Remove the IH COVER. (p122) 11. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130) 12. Remove the screw that secures the R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR. A) Silver M1.7x6 Pan machine screw with S.W: 1 pcs
Clamp
13. Pull out the cable from the groove of the Maintenance Box Holder. 14. Release the cable from the four clamps at front side.
Acetate tape
CR Spacer
Groove
15. Remove the pieces of acetate tape, and release the cable. Cable
16. Release the cable from the two hooks of the CR Spacer. 17. Release the cable from the three clamps at right side.
Bottom side
18. Disconnect the Cable from the Relay Connector (No.9), and remove the R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR. A
Figure 3-37. Removing the R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
141 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.22 L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the BOARD BOX FAN. (p234)
9.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
SUB-B BOARD
Clamp CN8
Maintenance Box Holder
10. Remove the Lower Paper Guide (Left) (p120)
L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
11. Remove the screw that secures the L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR. Clamp
A) Silver M1.7x6 Pan machine screw with S.W: 1 pcs 12. Pull out the cable from the groove of the Maintenance Box Holder. 13. Release the cable from the nine clamps. 14. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN8) of the SUB-B BOARD.
Groove Cable Bottom side
A
Figure 3-38. Removing the L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
142 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.2.23 INTERLOCK SWITCH 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133)
7.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
8.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
9.
Remove the screw, and remove the INTERLOCK SWITCH.
INTERLOCK SWITCH
Clamp
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
Front side
10. Release the cable from the four clamps at front side. Insert the hook of the INTERLOCK SWITCH to the hole on the Front Support Frame. Back side
A Hook
Front Support Frame
Figure 3-39. Removing the INTERLOCK SWITCH
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
143 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
11. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN20) of the MAIN BOARD.
Right side
12. Release the cable of the INTERLOCK SWITCH from 12 clamps. Back side
Clamp
Clamps
MAIN BOARD
Cable
Cable CN20
Figure 3-40. Releasing the Cable (MAIN BOARD) Figure 3-42. Releasing the Cable (Right side) Clamps
Board Box
Cable
Figure 3-41. Releasing the Cable (Top of the Board Box)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
144 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.3 Electric Circuit Components
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the Fan Frame. A) Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs
3.4.3.1 MAIN BOARD A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
Revision A
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
Clamp
MAIN BOARD Cable CN25
Wire saddle
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133)
7.
Remove the BOARD BOX FAN. (p234)
8.
Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN25) of the MAIN BOARD.
9.
Release the cable from the clamp and the wire saddle.
A
A
Fan Frame
Figure 3-43. Removing the Fan Frame
Wrap the cable one turn counterclockwise through the clamp.
Clamp Cable
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
145 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
11. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN500) of the MAIN BOARD.
14. Remove the two screws, and remove the Lower Option Fixing Plate.
12. Release the cable from the clamp.
C) Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 1 pcs
13. Remove the five screws, and remove the Option Fixing Plate.
D) Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 1 pcs
B) Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 5 pcs
C H E C K P O IN T CN500
Use a stubby screwdriver when removing the screw C.
Cable Clamp
Align the dowel on the MAIN BOARD with the positioning hole on the Lower Option Fixing Plate. (Figure 3-45)
Option Fixing Plate
MAIN BORAD Tab and positioning hole
C Lower Option Fixing Plate B B
B D
B
B
Figure 3-45. Removing the Lower Option Fixing Plate
Figure 3-44. Removing the Option Fixing Plate
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
146 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
15. Disconnect the all FFCs and the cables from the connectors of the MAIN BORAD. 16. Remove the fourteen screws, and remove the MAIN BOARD and the LAN Connector Cover. E) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw: 9 pcs F) Silver M3x6 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs G) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw: 1 pcs H) Silver M2.5x6 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs
LAN Connector Cover
E
E
E
F E E
E
F
MAIN BOARD G
E
E
E
H
Figure 3-46. Removing the MAIN BOARD
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
147 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.3.2 SUB BOARD 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
8.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
9.
Remove the CR COVER. (p155)
CR Front Frame
A
Positioning point
CR UNIT A
10. Move the CR UNIT to the left end. Front Support Frame
11. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Front Frame.
Positioning point
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Figure 3-47. Removing the CR Front Frame
Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure, Figure 3-47). CR Front Frame
Positioning point
Positioning point Front Support Frame
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
148 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 12. Disengage the two hooks of the Upper EJ Holder, and remove the Upper EJ Holder.
Revision A 13. Disconnect all cables and FFCs connected to the SUB BOARD. 14. Remove the four screws, and remove the SUB BOARD. B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw: 4 pcs
Hooks
A
A
A
A
SUB BOARD
Upper EJ Holder
Figure 3-48. Removing the Upper EJ Holder
Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure). Positioning points Upper Support Frame
Figure 3-49. Removing the SUB BOARD
Upper EJ Holder Positioning point
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
149 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.3.3 SUB-B BOARD 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Disconnect all cables and FFCs connected to the SUB-B BOARD.
8.
Remove the four screws, and remove the SUB-B BOARD. A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs
A
A
A
A
SUB-B BOARD
Figure 3-50. Removing the SUB-B BOARD
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
150 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.3.4 PSH BOARD A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
Lower Board Frame A A
C A U T IO N
If the optional Large Format Scanner Stand is attached, take care not to drop screws inside the stand because there are holes for accessing screws. A
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133)
7.
Remove the BOARD BOX FAN. (p234)
A
Figure 3-51. Removing the Lower Board Frame
8. Remove the MAIN BOARD. (p145) 9.
Remove the four screws, and remove the Lower Board Frame. A) Silver M4x8 Cup S-tite screw: 4 pcs
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
151 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
10. Remove the two screws that secure the PS Plate, and pull the PS Plate slightly toward you.
12. Remove the six screws, and remove the PSH BOARD from the PS Plate. C) Silver M3x6 screw: 6 pcs
B) Silver M3x6 screw: 2 pcs 11. Disconnect the cables from the connectors (CN1, CN51) of the PSH BOARD, and remove the PS Plate.
PSH BOARD
PS Plate
D
D
D
D
D
Cable PSH BOARD CN1 Cable CN51
D
PS Plate
B
B
Figure 3-53. Removing the PSH BOARD
Figure 3-52. Removing the PS Plate
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
152 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.3.5 PANEL BOARD 1.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
2.
Remove the two screws that secure the Panel Housing.
PANEL BOARD
CN1
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs 3.
Disconnect the cable and FFC from the connector (CN1) of the PANEL BOARD. Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure). Positioning points
FFC
RIGHT UPPER COVER Panel Housing
A
A
Panel Housing
Positioning point
Figure 3-54. Removing the Panel Housing
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
153 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 4.
Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN3) of the PANEL BOARD.
5.
Remove the six screws that secure the PANEL BOARD.
Revision A
B) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw: 6 pcs 6.
Disengage the two hooks of the Panel Housing, and remove the PANEL BOARD. FFC
B
CN3
B
B PANEL BOARD
B
Hook
Hook
B
B Panel Housing
Figure 3-55. Removing the PANEL BOARD
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
154 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4 Carriage Mechanism / Ink System Mechanism 3.4.4.1 CR COVER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
8.
Unlock the CR UNIT.(p116)
9.
Move the CR UNIT on the Platen.
CR COVER
CR UNIT
A
A
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR COVER. A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
Figure 3-56. Removing the CR COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
155 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.2 DAMPER KIT A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
2.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
3.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
4.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
5.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
8.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
9.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
10. Remove the CR COVER. (p155)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
156 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 11. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Rear Frame.
Revision A
When installing the CR Rear Frame, check the following. Align the two positioning points (upper) and secure with two screws while pulling toward you. Make sure that two positioning points (lower) are engaged with the holes on the Rear Tube Guide.
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Positioning point (upper) CR Rear Frame
A
Positioning point (upper)
Positioning point (upper) Positioning point (lower)
CR Rear Frame
Positioning point (upper)
A
Positioning point (lower) Positioning points must be engaged with the holes. Rear Tube Guide
Figure 3-57. Removing the CR Rear Frame
Move the CR UNIT from the left end of the Rear Frame to the full side and check from the side to make sure that FFC Protection Sheet and Rear Tube Guide are not interfering with each other.
Full side CR UNIT
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
Left edge of the Rear Frame
Rear Frame
157 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Left side view
Revision A 12. Move the CR UNIT on the Platen.
Rear Tube Guide
FFC Protection Sheet
13. Remove the six screws, and remove the CR Sub Fixing Plate. B) Silver M3x10 Machine screw: 4 pcs
CR UNIT
C) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
Secure the Grounding wire and the plate with the same screw shown in the below figure. Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-58).
B
Positioning points B
B
CR Sub Tube Frame C C
CR Sub Fixing Plate Screw together B
Grounding wire DAMPER KIT CR UNIT
Figure 3-58. Removing the CR Sub Fixing Plate
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
158 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 14. Remove the FFC Clamp. 15. Remove the FFC Protection Sheet.
FFC Clamp
Revision A
Install the FFC Protection Sheet as follows. (Colored parts are used here to make explanation easier.) 1. Slide the FFC Protection Sheet under the two hooks on the CR UNIT. 2. Slide the FFC Protection Sheet under the two flat clamps. (Make sure that the grounding wire is routed under the FFC Protection Sheet.) 3. Secure the FFC Protection Sheet with the FFC Clamp. (Take care not to damage the FFC Clamp.)
FFC Clamp FFC Protection Sheet Hook
Flat clamp
FFC Protection Sheet Hook
Figure 3-59. Removing the FFC Protection Sheet
Grounding wire
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
159 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.
Disconnect the CR FFC from the connector (CN100) of the SUB BOARD.
5.
Remove the two flat clamps.
6.
Release the CR FFC from the two hooks of the CR UNIT, and place the CR FFC over the rear of the printer temporarily.
When reassembling, secure the CR FFC and the grounding wire with the hook and clamps.
Clamp
Flat clamp
Double faced tape CR FFC
CR FFC
Grounding wire
CN100 Hooks
C A U T IO N SUB BOARD
Figure 3-60. Releasing the CR FFC
Put CR FFC on the double-faced tape of the CR UNIT top surface. (To prevent the CR FFC from loosening and rubbing with a metal plate.)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
7.
Do not remove the ink tube from damper kit when you do the PRINT HEAD, HEAD FFC and CR FFC exchange work. When the INK TUBE is removed at the following step, ink may drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the DAMPER KIT. D) Silver M2.5x16 screw: 2 pcs
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
160 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
CR FFC
Revision A 8.
Remove the three screws, and remove the DAMPER KIT. E) Silver M3x10 Machine screw: 3 pcs
INK TUBE
DAMPER KIT
D
Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubbers are attached to it. Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning liquid. Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with tightening torque about 0.39 ± 0.05 Nm. Joint Rubber
D
Figure 3-61. Removing the INK TUBE
Upper side E E
E DAMPER KIT
Figure 3-62. Removing the DAMPER KIT
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
161 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.3 PRINT HEAD A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
HEAD FFC Connector
Connector
PRINT HEAD
C A U T IO N
Be careful not to touch the nozzle surface of the PRINT HEAD.
1.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
2.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
3.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
4.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
5.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
8.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
9.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
Figure 3-63. Removing the HEAD FFC
13. Remove the three screws, and remove the PRINT HEAD. A) Silver M2.6x8 Machine screw: 3 pcs Upper side
A
A
PRINT HEAD
10. Remove the CR COVER. (p155) 11. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p156) 12. Disconnect the HEAD FFCs from the four connectors of the PRINT HEAD. C H E C K P O IN T
Recording the Head ID (p326) in advance will make installation of the new Printhead easier. (It is recommended to use a digital camera.)
A
Figure 3-64. Removing the PRINT HEAD
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
162 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.4 HEAD FFC
13. Disconnect the HEAD FFCs from the four connectors of the PRINT HEAD.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
14. Pull out the HEAD FFC from the Ferrite Core.
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
15. Release the HEAD FFC from the two hooks of the CR UNIT.
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
8.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
9.
Remove the CR COVER. (p155)
Hook
Ferrite Core
Hook HEAD FFC Connector
Connector PRINT HEAD
10. Remove the DAMPER KIT (Do not remove the INK TUBE). (p156) 11. Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133) 12. Remove the BOARD BOX FAN. (p234) C H E C K P O IN T
Engaging the DUMPER KIT into the groove on the frame will make the work easier. Figure 3-65. Removing the HEAD FFC DUMPER KIT
Groove of the frame
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
163 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
16. Remove the two FFC clamps.
18. Pull out the CR FFC and HAED FFC from the two Ferrite Cores.
17. Remove the screw that secures the FFC Shield Plate.
Screw together
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
Attach the HEAD FFC, CR FFC, and FFC Shield Plate (Upper/ Lower) to the Carriage Main Assy as follows.
FFC Shield Plate and Lower FFC Sheet Guide
Positioning points Grounding wire A
Carriage Main Assy
Ferrite Cores CR FFC
HEAD FFC, CR FFC FFC Clamps
HEAD FFC FFC Shield Plate (Upper/Lower)
Figure 3-66. Removing the HEAD FFC (Top of the CR UNIT)
Secure the Grounding wire and the plate with the same screw shown in the below figure. Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-66).
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
164 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 19. Remove the three screws, and remove the Upper Reinforce Plate. (SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T3200 series only)
Revision A 20. Remove the three screws, and remove the FFC Guide Assy. D) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs C) Silver M4x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Screwing the Upper Reinforce Plate in the order of (1) => (2) => (3) as shown in Figure 3-67.
D
FFC Guide Assy
D
.
Rear Main Frame D Upper Reinforce Plate C
C 1
2
Figure 3-68. Removing the FFC (Top of the Rear Main Frame)
3 B
Figure 3-67. Removing the Upper Reinforce Plate
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
165 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 21. Disengage the four joints from the two each holes on the FFC Sheet Guide.
Revision A 22. Remove the FFC Shield Guide Upper and the FFC Shield Plate Upper from the HEAD FFC and the CR FFC.
Joints and holes
FFC Shield Guide Upper/ FFC Shield Plate Upper HEAD FFC/ CR FFC
Figure 3-70. Removing the FFC Shield Guide Upper/FFC Shield Plate Upper
Figure 3-69. Releasing the FFC (1)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
166 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 23. Peel off the acetate tape.
Revision A 25. Remove the FFC Clamp from the APG Frame.
24. Remove the four FFC Clamps on the side of the Rear Main Frame. APG Frame Rear Main Frame FFC Clamp Acetate tape
FFC Clamps
Figure 3-72. Releasing the FFC (3)
Figure 3-71. Releasing the FFC (2)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
167 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 26. Remove the two FFC Clamps from the top of the Board Box. 27. Disconnect the HAED FFC and the CR FFC from the connectors (CN100, CN101, CN102) of the MAIN BOARD.
Revision A
When replacing the FFC Shield Guide Lower with a new one, apply it as shown below.
28. Pull out the HAED FFC and the CR FFC from the Ferrite Core on the Board Box. 29. Remove the HEAD FFC.
FFC Shield Guide Lower Double-sided tape
FFC Clamps Ferrite Core
CN102 CN101 CN100
HEAD FFC CR FFC MAIN BOARD
Figure 3-73. Removing the HEAD FFC (Around the Board Box)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
168 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.5 CR FFC 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
8.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
9.
Remove the CR COVER. (p155)
CR FFC
Double-sided tape
10. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p156) Figure 3-74. Removing the CR FFC
11. Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133) 12. Remove the BOARD BOX FAN. (p234) 13. Remove the HEAD FFC. (p163) 14. Peel off the CR FFC, and remove the CR FFC.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
169 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.6 CR SCALE A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
8.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
170 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 9.
Remove the two screws, and remove the CR Rear Frame.
Revision A
When installing the CR Rear Frame, check the following. Align the two positioning points and secure with two screws while pulling toward you.
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Positioning point (upper)
Positioning point
CR Rear Frame
Positioning point
CR Rear Frame
A
Positioning point (upper) Positioning point (lower)
A
Positioning point (lower)
Rear Tube Guide
Move the CR UNIT from the left end of the Rear Frame to the full side and check from the side to make sure that FFC Protection Sheet and Rear Tube Guide are not interfering with each other.
Full side
Figure 3-75. Removing the CR Rear Frame
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
CR UNIT
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
Left edge of the Rear Frame
Rear Frame
171 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Left side view
Revision A 10. Remove the five screws, and remove the Rear Tube Guide.
Rear Tube Guide
FFC Protection Sheet
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs B) Silver M4x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
CR UNIT
Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-76).
Left side
Right side B
L Reinforce Plate
R Reinforce Plate
A Positioning point
A
A Positioning points
A Positioning point
Rear Tube Guide
Figure 3-76. Removing the Rear Tube Guide
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
172 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 11. Remove the Tension spring.
Revision A 14. Remove the CR SCALE from the hook of the CR Scale Holder.
12. Remove the CR SCALE from the hook of the CR Scale Holder B.
Right side CR SCALE
Left side Tension spring
CR Scale Holder
CR Scale Holder B CR SCALE
Hook Hook
Figure 3-77. Removing the CR SCALE (Left side)
13. Remove the CR SCALE from the two each hooks on the two CR Scale Holder.
Figure 3-79. Removing the CR SCALE (Right)
15. Remove the CR SCALE from the CR UNIT. CR Scale Holder Hook
Hook
Since the CR SCALE has a specific orientation, install it in the direction so that you can read the letters L/R correctly from the front. Route the CR SCALE through the detection point on the CR ENCODER on the rear of the CR UNIT when installing it.
CR SCALE
Figure 3-78. Removing the CR SCALE (Center)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
173 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Side view
CR SCALE
CR ENCODER
Detection point CR UNIT
Figure 3-80. Removing the CR SCALE
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
174 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.7 CR ENCODER A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
CR ENCODER
Connector A
1.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
2.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
3.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
4.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
5.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
8.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
9.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
A FFC
Figure 3-81. Removing the CR ENCODER
10. Remove the CR COVER. (p155) 11. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p156) 12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p162) 13. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130) 14. Remove the APG UNIT. (p181) 15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p178) 16. Remove the CR SCALE. (p170) 17. Remove the CR UNIT. (p193) 18. Remove the two screws, and remove the CR ENCODER. A) Silver M2.6x8 Machine screw: 2 pcs 19. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the CR ENCODER.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
175 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.4.8 CR TIMMING BELT A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
Revision A
In the next step, the two plastic washers at the both ends of the pulley shaft will come off. Be careful not to lose them.
C A U T IO N
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
19. Remove the Pulley, Shaft, and Belt together from the Pulley Holder. 1.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
2.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
3.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
4.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
5.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
Pulley Cover
A
Shaft
Pulley
B
8.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
9.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
CR TIMMING BELT Pulley Holder
Plastic washer Back side
Shaft
Plastic washer
10. Remove the CR COVER. (p155) 11. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p156) 12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p162) 13. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130) 14. Remove the APG UNIT. (p181) 15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p178)
Figure 3-82. Disassembling the Pulley Holder
16. Remove the CR SCALE. (p170) 17. Remove the CR UNIT. (p193) 18. Remove the two screws, and remove the Pulley Cover. A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs B) Silver M3x12 Machine screw: 1 pcs
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
176 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
20. Remove the CR TIMING BELT from the Belt Holder on the back side of the CR UNIT.
CR UNIT
CR TIMING BELT
Belt Holder
Figure 3-83. Removing the CR TIMING BELT
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
177 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.4.9 CR MOTOR A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
Revision A
Left side
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133)
7.
Remove the BOARD BOX FAN. (p234)
8.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
9.
Remove the APG UNIT. (p181)
Pulley Holder
Screws
Belt tension screw
CR TIMMING BELT
Figure 3-84. Loosening the CR TIMMING BELT tension
14. Remove the CR TIMING BELT from the pinion gear of the CR MOTOR. 15. Remove the two screws that secure the CR MOTOR. A) Silver M4x10 Machine screw: 2 pcs Right side
10. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
CR MOTOR
11. Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
CR TIMMING BELT Pinion gear
12. Loosen the two screws that secure the Pulley Holder. C H E C K P O IN T
Before loosening the tension at the next step, mark the position of the Pulley Holder to make the required adjustment easier.
13. Rotate the Belt tension screw counterclockwise to loosen the tension of the CR TIMING BELT.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
A
A
Figure 3-85. Removing the CR TIMMING BELT
178 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 16. Disconnect the cable of the CR MOTOR from the connector (CN19) of the MAIN BOARD.
Revision A 18. Cut the cable tie that secures the cable, and remove the CR MOTOR.
17. Release the cable from five clamps.
CR MOTOR
Cable tie
Clamps
Clamp
Cable MAIN BOARD
Figure 3-87. Removing the CR MOTOR CN19
Figure 3-86. Releasing the Cable
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
179 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.10 CR HP SENSOR 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
7.
Move the CR UNIT on the Platen.
8.
Disengage the hooks, and remove the CR HP SENSOR.
9.
Disconnect the cable from the CR HP SENSOR.
Hook
CR HP SENSOR
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-88. Removing the CR HP SENSOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
180 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.11 APG UNIT A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
Upper Reinforce Plate
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
APG UNIT
Rear Tube Guide
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
B B
Positioning point
R Reinforce Plate
A
C A U T IO N
7.
When removing the R Reinforce Plate in the next step, take care not to remove the Upper Reinforce Plate together.
A
A
Remove the five screws, and remove the R Reinforce Plate. A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs 1
B) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-89). Tighten three screws A of R Reinforce Plate as follows. 1.Temporarily tighten screw (1) in Figure 3-89. 2.Tighten screws (2) and (3) in order. 3.Tighten screw (1) fully.
3
2
R Reinforce Plate
Figure 3-89. Removing the R Reinforce Plate
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
181 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 4.
Remove the three screws that secure the APG UNIT.
Revision A 5.
C) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs
Disconnect the cable from the connector of the APG Motor, and remove the APG UNIT.
Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-90). APG Motor
APG UNIT
Connector Cable APG UNIT
C
Positioning point
Figure 3-91. Removing the Cable
C C
Positioning point
CR MOTOR HOLDER
Figure 3-90. Removing the APG UNIT
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
182 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.12 PG SENSOR 1.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
2.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
3.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
4.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
5.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
8.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
9.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
PG SENSOR
Hook
10. Remove the CR COVER. (p155) 11. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p156) Figure 3-92. Removing the PG SENSOR
12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p162) 13. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
19. Disconnect the Cable from the PG SENSOR.
14. Remove the APG UNIT. (p181)
Cable
15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p178)
Connector
PG SENSOR
16. Remove the CR SCALE. (p170) 17. Remove the CR UNIT. (p193) 18. Disengage the hooks, and remove the PG SENSOR.
Figure 3-93. Removing the Cable
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
183 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.4.13 PUMP CAP UNIT A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
13. Remove the Waste Ink Tube from the PUMP CAP UNIT.
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133)
7.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
8.
Unlock the CR UNIT.(p116)
9.
Move the CR UNIT on the Platen.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
14. Remove the PUMP CAP UNIT in the direction of the arrow. Upper side
A
A
PUMP CAP UNIT
A PUMP CAP UNIT
Relay Connector (No.7, No.11, No.34)
When removing the R Reinforce Plate in the next step, take care not to remove the Upper Reinforce Plate together. A
10. Remove the R Reinforce Plate. (p181) When installing the R Reinforce Plate, make sure to tighten the screws on the R Reinforce Plate in the specified order following the procedure (p181). 11. Disconnect the cables from the Relay Connector (No.7, No.11, No.34). 12. Remove the three screws that secure the PUMP CAP UNIT. A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 3 pcs C A U T IO N
Waste Ink Tube
In the next step, waste ink may spill from the Waste Ink Tube if the tube is disconnected from the PUMP CAP UNIT. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
PUMP CAP UNIT
Figure 3-94. Removing the PUMP CAP UNIT
184 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.4.14 IC HOLDER A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
Revision A 17. Disconnect the cable from the Relay Connector (No.2, No.8, No.10).
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
18. Remove the FFC from the back side of the IC HOLDER. IC HOLDER
Relay Connector (No.2, No.8, No.10)
1.
Perform the Ink eject. (p337)
2.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
3.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
4.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
5.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
6.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
7.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
8.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
9.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
FFC
10. Remove the IH COVER. (p122) 11. Remove the REAR COVER (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only). (p221)
Figure 3-95. Disconnecting the Relay connectors and FFC
12. Remove the REAR COVER SENSOR (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only). (p222) 13. Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p138) 14. Remove the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p229) 15. Remove the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p231) 16. Remove the UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p230)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
185 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 19. Remove the screw that secures the Rear Cover (SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only).
Revision A 21. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the Maintenance Box Holder. 22. Peel of the FFC from the frame and insert it into the edging saddle.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs 20. Disengage the boss of the Rear Cover, and remove the Rear Cover (SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only).
Back side Double-sided tape Double-sided tape
Boss FFC Back side
Rear Cover Edging saddle
A
Maintenance Box Holder
Connector
Figure 3-97. Releasing the FFC
Figure 3-96. Removing the Rear Cover
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
186 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 23. Remove the four screws that secure the IC HOLDER.
Revision A
C A U T IO N
B) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 4 pcs 24. Pull the IC holder slightly toward you.
When the INK TUBE is removed at the following step, ink may drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
Front side
25. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the IC HOLDER. C) Silver M2.5x16 Machine screw: 2 pcs B
B B
B
26. Remove the IC HOLDER while pulling out the FFC. IC HOLDER
INK TUBE C C
IC HOLDER
Figure 3-98. Removing the IC HOLDER (1)
Figure 3-99. Removing the IC HOLDER (2)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
187 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubber are attached to it. Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning liquid. Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with tightening torque about 0.39 ± 0.05 Nm Joint Rubber
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
188 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.15 INK TUBE A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
INK TUBE DAMPER KIT
1.
Perform the Ink eject. (p337)
2.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
3.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
4.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
5.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
6.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
7.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
8.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
9.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
A
A
10. Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
Figure 3-100. Removing the INK TUBE (1)
11. Remove the CR COVER. (p155)
12. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubber are attached to it. Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning liquid. Secure the screws that secure the Ink Supply Tube with tightening torque about 0.39 ± 0.05 Nm
13. Remove the IH COVER. (p122) 14. Remove the CR Sub Fixing Plate. (p158) C A U T IO N
Joint Rubber
When the INK TUBE is removed at the following step, ink may drip off from the tube. Prepare a waste cloth or the like in advance and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
15. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the DAMPER KIT. A) Silver M2.5x16 Machine screw: 2 pcs
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
189 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 16. Disengage the two each hooks on the five (SC-T3000 series: four) Tube Holders, and release the INK TUBE. Tube Holder
Revision A When mounting the Tube Holders, attach the following points: Move the INK TUBE to the position shown in Fig 3-103 before reassembling. Work on installation with a turn from No.1 holder which is the nearest to CR Unit to No.5 holder. Only No.1 holder, mounting direction is upside down of the other holders. Projection of a holder is mounted upward only No.1. (purpose: prevent noise during CR movement)
Hooks
Holder No.1: Projection is in the upside.
Tube Holders INK TUBE
Holder No.2-5: Projection is in the downside.
5 4 3 1
2
After attaching holders, adjust digit position of them in the center of mark holes on the Tube Guide Plate.
Figure 3-101. Removing the INK TUBE (Left side) Holder No.2-5 Adjust in the center of holes
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
Holder No.1 Adjust in the center of holes
190 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 17. Remove the screw and release the INK TUBE by lifting the Front Tube fixing Plate. B) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
18. Disengage the hooks, and remove the three Tube Holders. Back side Tube Holder
Take care not to press the INK TUBE flat with the Front Tube fixing Plate.
Back side
Revision A
Hook
Front Tube fixing Plate
INK TUBE
Tube Holders B
Figure 3-103. Removing the Tube Holder Front Tube fixing Plate
Figure 3-102. Releasing the INK TUBE (Front side)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
191 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 19. Remove the two screws, and remove the INK TUBE from the IC HOLDER.
Revision A
C) Silver M2.5x16 screw: 2 pcs C H E C K P O IN T
If you find it difficult to remove the INK TUBE, remove the four screws that secure the IC HOLDER and pull the holder slightly toward you when working on it. (p.185)
When installing the INK TUBE, attach it with the red line facing down. Before installing the joint, make sure the Joint Rubber are attached to it. Before attaching the Joint Rubber, let it get wet with cleaning liquid. Joint Rubber
IC HOLDER
INK TUBE C C
Figure 3-104. Removing the INK TUBE (3)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
192 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.16 CR UNIT A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
2.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
3.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
4.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
5.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
8.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
9.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
A A
Belt tension screw
Pulley Holder Assy
Figure 3-105. Removing the Pulley Holder Assy
10. Remove the CR COVER. (p155) 11. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p156) 12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p162) 13. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130) 14. Remove the APG UNIT. (p181) 15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p178) 16. Remove the CR SCALE. (p170) 17. Remove the Belt tension screw and the two screws on the upper part of the Pulley Holder Assy, then remove the Pulley Holder Assy. A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
193 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
18. Pull out the HEAD FFC from the Ferrite Core.
20. Remove the two FFC clamps from the top of the CR UNIT.
19. Release the HEAD FFC from the two hooks of the CR UNIT.
21. Remove the screw that secures the FFC Shield Plate. B) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
Hook
Hook
Ferrite Core
HEAD FFC
Secure the Grounding wire and the plate with the same screw shown in the below figure. Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-107).
22. Pull out the HEAD FFC and CR FFC from the two Ferrite Cores. Screw together FFC Shield Plate and Lower FFC Sheet Guide
Positioning points Grounding wire B
Carriage Main Assy
Ferrite Core CR FFC
Figure 3-106. Removing the HEAD FFC
FFC Clamps HEAD FFC
Figure 3-107. Removing the HAED FFC and CR FFC (Top of the CR UNIT)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
194 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
23. Remove the Wiper Cleaner.
26. Remove the CR UNIT while sliding in the direction of the arrow.
24. Remove the five screws, and remove the CR Motor Holder. C) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 5 pcs CR UNIT
25. Remove the screw, and remove the CR Scale Holder. D) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
CR Motor Holder C C D C
Wiper Cleaner C C
CR Scale Holder
Figure 3-109. Removing the CR UNIT
Figure 3-108. Removing the CR Scale Holder
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
195 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.17 IM SENSOR A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
2.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
3.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
4.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
5.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
8.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
9.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
A
Sensor Cover
CR UNIT
Hooks
10. Remove the CR COVER. (p155) 11. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p156) 12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p162) 13. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130) 14. Remove the APG UNIT. (p181) 15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p178) Sensor Cover
16. Remove the CR SCALE. (p170) 17. Remove the CR UNIT. (p193)
Figure 3-110. Removing the Sensor Cover
18. Remove the screw that secures the Sensor Cover. A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs 19. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cover.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
196 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
20. Disconnect the FFC from the IM SENSOR, and remove the IM SENSOR. Make sure that you can see the light emitter/receiver of the IM SENSOR through the hole on the Sensor Cover.
IM SENSOR FFC
IM SENSOR (Light emitter/receiver) Hole
Connector
Sensor Cover
Figure 3-111. Removing the IM SENSOR 1
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
197 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.4.18 PW SENSOR A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Perform the Tube inner pressure reduction. (p325)
2.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
3.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
4.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
5.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
8.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
9.
Unlock the CR UNIT. (p116)
A
Sensor Cover
CR UNIT
Hooks
10. Remove the CR COVER. (p155) 11. Remove the DAMPER KIT. (p156) 12. Remove the PRINT HEAD. (p162) 13. Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130) 14. Remove the APG UNIT. (p181) 15. Remove the CR MOTOR. (p178) Sensor Cover
16. Remove the CR SCALE. (p170) 17. Remove the CR UNIT. (p193)
Figure 3-112. Removing the Sensor Cover
18. Remove the screw that secures the Sensor Cover. A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs 19. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cover.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
198 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
20. Disconnect the FFC from the PW SENSOR, and remove the PW SENSOR. Make sure that you can see the light emitter/receiver of the PW SENSOR through the hole on the Sensor Cover.
PW SENSOR (Light emitter/receiver) PW SENSOR
FFC
Sensor Cover
Hole
Connector
Figure 3-113. Removing the PW SENSOR
あ
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
199 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5 Paper Feed Mechanism
Tension Spring
3.4.5.1 PF MOTOR A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
A
PF MOTOR
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
9.
Remove the Tension Spring.
PF Motor Mounting Plate
A
Positioning point
Figure 3-114. Removing the PF Motor Mounting Plate
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the PF Motor Mounting Plate. A) Silver M4x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-114).
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
200 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 11. Remove the two screws, and remove the PF MOTOR from the PF Motor Mounting Plate.
Revision A 13. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN1) of the SUB-B BOARD. 14. Release the cable from the four clamps, and remove the PF MOTOR.
A) Silver M3x5 Machine screw: 2 pcs 12. Release the cable from the Edging Saddle.
SUB-B BOARD
PF MOTOR Edging Saddle
PF Motor Mounting Plate
PF MOTOR
B
CN1
B
Cable Clamp
Cable
Figure 3-116. Releasing the Cable
Figure 3-115. Removing the PF MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
201 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.2 PF SCALE A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
9.
Remove the PF ENCODER. (p203) Figure 3-117. Removing the PF SCALE
10. Remove the PF SCALE.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
PF SCALE
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
202 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.5.3 PF ENCODER A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
Revision A
Engage the two hooks on the PF Encoder Assy under the PF Roller Frame by sliding the assy.
PF Encoder Assy
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
9.
Remove the screw that secures the PF Encoder Assy.
Hooks
PF Roller Frame
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs 10. Disengage the two hooks of the PF Encoder Assy, and remove the PF Encoder Assy. PF Encoder Assy
Hooks
A
Figure 3-118. Removing the PF Encoder Assy
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
203 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
11. Remove the screw, and remove the PF ENCODER. B) Silver M2.5x6 P-tite screw: 1 pcs 12. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the PF ENCODER.
FFC
B Connector PF ENCODER
Figure 3-119. Removing the PF ENCODER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
204 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.5.4 PF TIMING BELT A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
Revision A
Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-120). Engage the hook on the PF Shade Cover into the hole on the Left Frame.
Inside Left Frame PF Shade Cover
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
9.
Remove the PF ENCODER. (p203)
Hook
PF Shade Cover
10. Remove the Tension Spring. (p200) 11. Remove the PF TIMING BELT from the pinion gear of the PF MOTOR. 12. Remove the screw, and remove the PF Shade Cover.
PF TIMING BELT
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs Pinion gear
A
Left Frame
Positioning point
Figure 3-120. Removing the PF Shade Cover
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
205 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
13. Remove the PF TIMING BELT.
PF TIMING BELT
Figure 3-121. Removing the PF TIMING BELT
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
206 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
Revision A 7.
Remove the Pressure Roller Shaft from the four grooves of the Release Roller Assy. Release Roller Assy Pressure Roller Shaft
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Rotate the Combination Gear 18.4, 37.6 counterclockwise to set the PRESSURE ROLLER in the release position.
Grooves Combination Gear 18.4, 37.6 Grooves
Figure 3-123. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER (1)
8.
Pull out the Pressure Roller Shaft from the three PRESSURE ROLLERs.
PRESSURE ROLLER
Figure 3-122. Rotate the Combination Gear 18.4, 37.6
Pressure Roller Shaft
Figure 3-124. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER (2)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
207 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.5.6 PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
Revision A 10. Remove the two Plastic washers, and remove the Combination gear 26, 12.8 and Combination gear 18.4, 37.6. 11. Remove the two screws, and remove the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR. A) Silver M2.6x4 machine screw: 2 pcs
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
9.
Remove the Rear Cover Cap while sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
A A
Pay attention to the positioning point (See Figure 3-125).
Plastic washers Combination gear 26, 12.8
Figure 3-126. Removing the Combination gear 26, 12.8 and Combination gear 18.4, 37.6 Rear Cover Cap
Positioning point
L Roll Side Frame
Figure 3-125. Removing the Rear Cover Cup
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
208 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
12. Remove the Motor Cover. 13. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR, and remove the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR.
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
Cable
Connector Motor Cover
Figure 3-127. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
209 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.7 PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
8.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
9.
Remove the PF MOTOR. (p200)
PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR
10. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6 counterclockwise to set the PRESSURE ROLLER in the release position (The sensor is in the transmissive state.). C H E C K P O IN T
Confirm the status of the PRESSURE ROLLER with the relative positions of the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR and Spur Gear 43 as shown below.
Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
Figure 3-128. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR Spur Gear 43
PRESSURE ROLLER: Release Sensor: Transmissive
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
PRESSURE ROLLER: Nip Sensor: Shaded
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
210 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 11. Remove the Plastic washer of the Combination gear 29, 59.2, and pull the Combination gear 29, 59.2 slightly toward you.
Revision A 14. Disconnect the cable from the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR.
12. Loosen the screw that secures the Spur gear 43, and pull the Spur gear 43 slightly toward you.
PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR
Combination gear 29, 59.2
Connector
Spur gear 43
Cable
Plastic washer
Figure 3-131. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (3)
Screw
Figure 3-129. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (1)
13. Disengage the hooks, and remove the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR. PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR Hook
Figure 3-130. Removing the PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR (2)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
211 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.8 ATC MOTOR A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the two screws, and remove the ATC MOTOR
A
A
ATC MOTOR
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with washer: 2 pcs
Figure 3-132. Removing the ATC MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
212 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 7.
Revision A
Remove the Motor Cover from the ATC MOTOR. ATC MOTOR Motor Cover
Figure 3-133. Removing the Motor Cover
8.
Disconnect the cable from the connector of the ATC MOTOR.
ATC MOTOR
Cable
Figure 3-134. Removing the Cable
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
213 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.9 PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER)
3.
Disengage the hook, and remove the PE SENSOR.
1.
Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p139)
4.
Release the cable from the hook of the Holder.
2.
Remove the two screws, and remove the PE Sensor Assy.
5.
Disconnect the cable from the PE SENSOR.
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Back side
Hook
Back side
PE Sensor Assy A
A
Connector
PE SENSOR
Cable
Figure 3-135. Removing the PE Sensor Assy
Holder Hook
Figure 3-136. Removing the PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
214 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.5.10 PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER) 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p139)
7.
Remove the REAR COVER (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only). (p221)
8.
Remove the REAR COVER SENSOR (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only). (p222)
9.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p138)
Revision A
Back side Rear Paper Guide
A
A
Rear Paper Guide
10. Remove the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p229) 11. Remove the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p231) 12. Remove the UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p230) 13. Remove the two screws, and remove the Rear Paper Guide in the direction of the arrow (SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only). A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs Figure 3-137. Removing the Rear Paper Guide
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
215 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
14. Release the two hooks on the PE Sensor Assy, and remove the PE Sensor Assy to the back side.
PE Sensor Assy
Hooks
Figure 3-138. Removing the PE Sensor Assy
15. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the Sensor Cap. 16. Disconnect the FFC from the PE SENSOR. Back side
Hooks
PE SENSOR
Connector
Sensor Cap
FFC
Figure 3-139. Removing the PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
216 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.11 PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
Paper Thickness Sensor Assy
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
A
A
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the two screws, and remove the Paper Thickness Sensor Assy while sliding in the direction of the arrow.
7.
Disengage the hook, and remove the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR.
8.
Disconnect the cable from the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR.
A) Silver M3x8 P-tite screw with built-in washer: 2 pcs
9.
Release the cable from the hook of the Sensor Holder.
Figure 3-140. Removing the Paper Thickness Sensor Assy
Installing the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR following standard. Connector
Hook
Paper Thickness Sensor
Hooks Hook
Sensor Holder Connector 5 mm +/- 1 mm Cable
PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR 5 mm +/- 1 mm
Figure 3-141. Removing the PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
217 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.5.12 PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT 1. Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134) 2. Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
Revision A 13. Remove the four Platen Adjust Cam Cover. (SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only).
Back side
Platen Adjust Cam Cover
3. Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153) 4. Remove the TOP COVER. (p118) 5.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
6.
Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p139)
7.
Remove the REAR COVER (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only). (p221)
8.
Remove the REAR COVER SENSOR (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only). (p222)
9.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p138)
Figure 3-142. Removing the Platen Adjust Cam Cover
10. Remove the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p229) 11. Remove the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p231) 12. Remove the UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only).(p230)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
218 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 14. Remove the eight screws, and remove the four Rear Paper Guide in the direction of the arrow (SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200 series only).
Revision A 15. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6 three turns counterclockwise to set the PRESSURE ROLLER in the release state.
A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 8 pcs Back side Rear Paper Guide
A
A
Combination gear 18.4, 37.6
Figure 3-144. Rotate the Combination gear 18.4, 37.6 Rear Paper Guide
Figure 3-143. Removing the Rear Paper Guide
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
219 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
16. Remove the eight screws that secure the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT using the ratchet driver. PF Roller
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 8 pcs
Hook Hook A
PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT
A
Tab Back side Step 19
Step 17
Figure 3-146. Removing the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT (2)
PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT
Figure 3-145. Removing the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT (1)
17. Disengage the tab of the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT using the flat-head screwdriver or the similar tool, and slide it to the left. 18. Lift the PF Roller and loosen the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT. 19. Slide the PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT in the direction of the arrow to release the two hooks, and remove it toward you.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
220 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.5.13 REAR COVER C H E C K P O IN T
1.
Revision A 2.
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only.
Remove the four screws, and remove the REAR COVER. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 4 pcs
Loosen the three Plastic screw, and open the REAR COVER. REAR COVER
REAR COVER Plastic screw
Plastic screw
Plastic screw
C A U T IO N
Do not remove A
Figure 3-147. Removing the REAR COVER (1) C A U T IO N
In the next step, do not remove the screw as shown Figure 3-148.
A
Figure 3-148. Removing the REAR COVER (2)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
221 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.5.14 REAR COVER SENSOR C H E C K P O IN T
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only.
Revision A 3.
Disengage the two hooks, and remove the REAR COVER SENSOR.
4.
Disconnect the cable from the connector. Route the cable through the two grooves on the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE ASSY. (Figure 3-150)
1.
Remove the REAR COVER. (p221)
2.
Remove the two screws, and remove the Rear Cover Fixing Plate. A) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs
Groove
Cable
Connector
REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE ASSY
Rear Cover Fixing Plate
Hook Hook
A A
REAR COVER SENSOR
Figure 3-150. Removing the REAR COVER SENSOR Figure 3-149. Removing the Rear Cover Fixing Plate
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
222 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.15 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY C H E C K P O IN T
Release Assy Guide
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only.
Home side
Full side A
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B. (p228)
8.
At the full side, remove the Extension spring.
9.
Remove the Sensor Holder. (p225)
Extension Spring
Extension Spring 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY
10. At the home side, remove the Extension Spring. 11. Remove the screw, and remove the Release Assy Guide. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 1 pcs
Shaft
Shaft
12. Remove the 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY from the shafts of the frame.
1st PPK ROLLER ASSY
Figure 3-151. Remove the 1st PPK ROLLER ASSY Lubrication
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
When replaced with a new part, make sure to lubricate the new one referring to “ Lubrication (p369)”.
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
223 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.16 1st PAPER GUIDE C H E C K P O IN T
.
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only. Back side A
A
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B. (p228)
8.
Remove the 1st PAPER PARK ROLLER ASSY. (p223)
9.
Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p139)
A
A
10. Remove the nineteen screws.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1st PAPER GUIDE
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 19 pcs
Figure 3-152. Removing the 1st PAPER GUIDE
11. Remove the four 1st PAPER GUIDE from the full side.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
A
A
A
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
224 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.17 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR C H E C K P O IN T
C A U T IO N
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only. Sensor Holder
If the optional Large Format Scanner Stand is attached, take care not to drop screws inside the stand because there are holes for accessing screws.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
7.
Remove the 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B. (p228)
8.
Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p139)
9.
Release the cable from the clamp of the Sensor Holder.
Cable A
A
Clamp
Figure 3-153. Removing the Sensor Holder
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the Sensor Holder. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
225 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
11. Remove the two screws. B) Silver M2.6x4 S-tite screw: 2 pcs C A U T IO N
So as not to let the motor drop, hold the motor when removing it.
12. Remove the Motor Cover. 13. Disconnect the cable from the connector. Motor Cover
Cables
B
Connector
1st PAPER FEED MOTOR
B
Figure 3-154. Removing the 1st PAPER FEED MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
226 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.18 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR C H E C K P O IN T
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only. A
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR ROLL COVER FRAME. (p139)
7.
Remove the two screws.
A
Connector 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR
A) Silver M2.6x4 S-tite screw: 2 pcs C A U T IO N
Cable
So as not to let the motor drop, hold the motor when removing it.
8.
Remove the Motor Cover.
9.
Disconnect the cable from the connector.
Motor Cover
Figure 3-155. Removing the 1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
227 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.19 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B C H E C K P O IN T
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Rotate the Sensor Cover until the hole comes on the top.
7.
Remove the Plastic ring, and remove the Sensor Cover and the parallel pin.
C A U T IO N
Hole
Sensor Cover
Plastic ring
Be careful not to drop the parallel pin. Parallel pin
Figure 3-156. Removing the Sensor Cover
8.
Disengage the four hooks, and remove the 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B.
9.
Disconnect the cables from the connectors. 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A
1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR B Hooks
Hooks
Connector Connector Hooks
Hooks
Cable
Cable
Figure 3-157. Removing the 1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
228 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.20 REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE C H E C K P O IN T
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only. Full side
1.
Open the REAR COVER. (p221)
2.
Remove the REAR COVER SENSOR. (p222)
3.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
4.
Loosen the two Adjustment Screw.
5.
Remove the five screws that secure the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE ASSY.
Home side
A
Adjustment Screw A
A
Adjustment Screw A
A Rear Cover Cap
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 5 pcs 6.
Pull out the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE at home side.
7.
Pull out the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE from the full side taking care not to let it come in contact with the Rear Cover Cap.
REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE
Figure 3-158. Removing the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
229 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.21 UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE C H E C K P O IN T
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only.
A
1.
Open the REAR COVER. (p221)
2.
Remove the REAR COVER SENSOR. (p222)
3.
Remove the REAR LEFT LOWER COVER. (p138)
4.
Remove the REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE. (p229)
5.
Remove the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE. (p231)
6.
Remove the eight screws, and remove the four UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE.
A
A
UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (Full side)
A
A
A
A
A
UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE
Figure 3-159. Removing the UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 8 pcs Tighten the screws in the order shown in below.
7
8
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
5
6
3
4
1
2
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
230 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.5.22 LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE C H E C K P O IN T
This section applies to the SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only.
3.
Pull the 2nd Roll Unit frontward.
4.
Remove the four LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE by pulling them downward. LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE
1. Remove the REAR COVER. (p221) 2.
Remove the fourteen screws. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 14 pcs 2nd Roll Unit
Tighten the screws in the order shown in below.
14
13
10
9
6
5
2
12
11
8
7
4
3
1
Figure 3-161. Removing the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (2)
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (Full side)
LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE
Figure 3-160. Removing the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (1)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
231 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.6 Cutter Mechanism CUTTER UNIT
3.4.6.1 CUTTER UNIT A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
Sensor cable
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the FRONT COVER. (p119)
7.
Remove the LEFT UPPER COVER & LEFT ROLL COVER. (p135)
8.
Remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. (p132)
9.
Remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p130)
CR Spacer
Clamp Acetate tape
Hook Clamps
Relay Connector (No.27)
Figure 3-162. Releasing the Sensor Cable
10. Remove the FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER. (p137) 11. Remove the IH COVER. (p122) 12. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE B. (p121) 13. Remove the LOWER PAPER GUIDE. (p120) 14. Disconnect the sensor cable from the Relay Connector (No.27). 15. Release the sensor cable from the four clamps. 16. Remove the pieces of acetate tape, and release the sensor cable. 17. Release the sensor cable from the hook of the CR Spacer.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
232 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 18. Remove the Motor Cover.
Revision A 20. Remove the two screws, and remove the CUTTER UNIT.
19. Disconnect the motor cable from the connector of the Cutter Motor.
A) Silver M3x6 screw: 2 pcs Pay attention to the positioning points (See Figure 3-164).
Cutter Motor Motor Cover
Motor cable CUTTER UNIT
Connector
Figure 3-163. Releasing the Motor Cable
Positioning Positioning point point
A
Positioning point
A
Bottom Frame
Figure 3-164. Removing the CUTTER UNIT
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
233 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.7 Fans
10. Remove the screw, and remove the BOARD BOX FAN. B) Silver M3x20 Bind machine screw: 1 pcs
3.4.7.1 BOARD BOX FAN 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133)
7.
Remove the two screws, and remove the Fan Frame.
BOARD BOX FAN B
A) Silver M3x6 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs 8.
Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN24) of the MAIN BOARD.
9.
Release the cable from the clamp.
A
Figure 3-166. Removing the BOARD BOX FAN
Clamp
Fan Frame Cable
CN24
A
Figure 3-165. Removing the Fan Frame
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
234 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.7.2 PW FAN 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133)
7.
Remove the BOARD BOX FAN. (p234)
8.
Remove the Fan Frame. (p145)
9.
Remove the Option Fixing Plate. (p145)
MAIN BOARD CN29 Clamp
PW FAN
A
Cable
A
10. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN29) of the MAIN BOARD. 11. Release the cable from the clamp 12. Remove the two screws, and remove the PW FAN. A) Silver M3x20 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs Figure 3-167. Removing the PW FAN
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
235 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.7.3 HDD FAN 1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
5.
Remove the RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER. (p128)
6.
Remove the REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p133)
7.
Remove the BOARD BOX FAN. (p234)
8.
Remove the Fan Frame. (p145)
9.
Remove the Option Fixing Plate. (p145)
Option Fixing Plate
HDD FAN
A
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the HDD FAN. A) Silver M3x20 Bind machine screw: 2 pcs A
Figure 3-168. Removing the HDD FAN
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
236 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.7.4 SUCTION FAN A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D
When replacing/removing this part, refer to “4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part” (p274) and make sure to perform the specified operations including required adjustment.
3.
Disconnect the cable from the Relay Connector.
4.
Remove the two sewers, and remove the SUCTION FAN. B) Silver M3x40 screw: 2 pcs Bottom side
1.
SUCTION FAN
Remove the screw that secures the Fan Cover. A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw with built-in washer: 1 pcs
2.
Slide the Fan Covers in the direction of the arrows to engage the two each hooks, and remove the two Fan Covers. Bottom side Fan Cover
B Hooks
Hooks A
SUCTION FAN
A
B
Figure 3-169. Removing the Fan Cover
Relay Connector
Figure 3-170. Removing the SUCTION FAN
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
237 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.8 Auto Take-up Reel
Revision A
Hook
TAKE-UP REEL COVER
Auto Take-up Reel
3.4.8.1 TAKE-UP REEL COVER 1.
Remove the two screws that secure the Auto Take-up Reel. A) Silver, Phillips, Pan S-tite with S.W & P.W. M4x10:
2 pcs
2.
Hold up the Auto Take-up Reel to disengage the hook, and remove the Auto Takeup Reel.
3.
Remove the four screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL COVER, and remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER from the Auto Take-up Reel. B) Black, Phillips, Pan P-tite M3x10:
4.
4 pcs
Disengage the six hooks that secure the Panel Cover from inside, and remove the Panel Cover from the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. A B
Figure 3-171. Removing the Auto Take-up Reel
TAKE-UP REEL COVER
Panel Cover
Hook
Figure 3-172. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
238 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.8.2 TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR 1.
Remove the screw that secures the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR. A) Black, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x10:
1 pcs
2.
Remove the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR from the Auto Take-up Reel.
3.
Disconnect the connector from the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR.
A
TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR
Auto Take-up Reel
Figure 3-173. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
239 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.8.3 TAKE-UP REEL LED 1.
Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel.
2.
Remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. (p238)
A
3.
Disconnect the connector (CN1) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
4.
Remove the four screws that secure the Power Supply Unit, and remove the Power Supply Unit. A) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6: four pieces:
Power Supply Unit
4 pcs
5.
Disconnect the connector (CN23) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
6.
Release the harness from the cable guide, and remove the TAKE-UP REEL LED.
Flange
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
A
A
CN1
A
Auto Take-up Reel
Figure 3-175. Removing the Power Supply Unit
TAKE-UP REEL LED TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
Cable guide
CN23
Figure 3-174. Removing the Flange
Figure 3-176. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL LED
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
240 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.8.4 TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel.
2.
Remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. (p238)
3.
Disconnect the connector (CN1) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
4.
Remove the four screws that secure the Power Supply Unit, and remove the Power Supply Unit. A) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6:
Auto Take-up Reel
Flange
1.
4 pcs
Figure 3-177. Removing the Flange A
A
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
A
Power Supply Unit
CN1
A
Figure 3-178. Removing the Power Supply Unit
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
241 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 5.
Disconnect the connector (CN17) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
6.
Remove the four screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH, and remove the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH from the Panel Cover. B) Black, Phillips, Bind P-tite screw M2x7 (bit: No.1):
Revision A
Panel Cover TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
4 pcs
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD B
Install the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH with the “ON/OFF/ON” inscription to the right. And install the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH with “M” inscription to the Manual side.
CN17 B
Inscription
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Figure 3-179. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
242 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.8.5 TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD 1.
Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel.
2.
Remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. (p238)
3.
Remove the two screws that secure the Plate A, and remove the Plate A. A) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6:
4.
Flange
Auto Take-up Reel
2 pcs
Remove the two screws that secure the Plate B, and remove the Plate B. B) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6:
1 pcs
C) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M4x8:
1 pcs
Figure 3-180. Removing the Flange
Plate B
C Plate A
B
A
Figure 3-181. Removing the Plate A/B
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
243 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 5.
Remove the six screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD, and remove the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD. D) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6:
6.
Revision A
6 pcs
TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD CN2
Disconnect the connectors (CN1, CN2) on the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD.
CN1
D
Figure 3-182. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
244 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.8.6 TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR Flange
1.
Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel.
2.
Remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. (p238)
3.
Disconnect the connector (CN1) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
4.
Remove the four screws that secure the Power Supply Unit, and remove the Power Supply Unit. A) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6:
Auto Take-up Reel
4 pcs
Figure 3-183. Removing the Flange A
A
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
A Power Supply Unit
CN1
A
Figure 3-184. Removing the Power Supply Unit
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
245 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 5.
Remove the two screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit. B) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6:
2 pcs
6.
Disconnect the connector from the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR, and remove the TAKEUP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit.
7.
Remove the C-Ring.
8.
Remove the four screws that secure the Motor Mounting Plate, and remove the Motor Mounting Plate. C) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M4x8:
9.
Revision A
C
Motor Mounting Plate
4 pcs
Remove the two gears from the Motor Mounting Plate.
10. Remove the two screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR, and remove the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR. D) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M3x6:
C-Ring
2 pcs
Figure 3-186. Removing the Motor Mounting Plate
B
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit
B
TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR Motor Mounting Plate
Connector Gear D
Gear
Figure 3-185. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD Unit
Figure 3-187. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
246 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.8.7 TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD Remove the Flange from the Auto Take-up Reel.
2.
Remove the TAKE-UP REEL COVER. (p238)
3.
Disconnect the connector (CN1) on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
4.
Remove the four screws that secure the Power Supply Unit, and remove the Power Supply Unit. A) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6:
Auto Take-up Reel
Flange
1.
4 pcs
Figure 3-188. Removing the Flange A
A
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
A Power Supply Unit
CN1
A
Figure 3-189. Removing the Power Supply Unit
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
247 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 5.
Revision A
Remove the four screws that secure the Shield Plate, and remove the three clamps and the Shield Plate. B) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6:
CN1
CN24* CN23 CN17 CN19*
CN18 CN14*
4 pcs
6.
Disconnect all the connectors on the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD.
7.
Remove the three screws that secure the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD, and remove the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD. C) Black, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x6:
CN4* CN2*
CN11*
3 pcs
CN10*
CN15*
CN8*
CN26*
CN22
CN7*
CN28
CN3
CN29
*: Unused connectors Figure 3-191. Connector location
Clamps Clamp
C TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
C
C
Shield Plate
B
Figure 3-190. Removing the Removing the Shield Plate Figure 3-192. Removing the TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
248 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Connector assignment: Connector assignment:
Color
CN1
White
TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD (CN2)
CN2*
White
Unused
CN3
-
USB-A
CN4*
-
Unused
CN7*
Black
Unused
CN8*
Blue
Unused
CN10*
Yellow
Unused
CN11*
Black
Unused
CN14*
Blue
Unused
CN15*
Red
Unused
CN17
White
TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
CN18
Black
TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
CN19*
Black
Unused
CN22
Yellow
CN23
Black
TAKE-UP REEL LED
CN24*
(FFC)
Unused
CN26*
Red
Unused
CN28
Red
TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR
CN29
White
TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR
Destination
TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
249 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9 2nd Roll Unit (SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series only) 3.4.9.1 FRONT FRAME 1.
Remove the Left Paper Check Hole and the Right Paper Check Hole.
2.
Remove the three screws, and remove the FRONT FRAME. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 3 pcs Insert the three ribs on the FRONT FRAME under the frame. (Figure 3-193)
Frame
Rib
A
A
A
Left Paper Check Hole
FRONT FRAME
Right Paper Check Hole
Figure 3-193. Removing the FRONT FRAME
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
250 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.2 REAR FRAME C A U T IO N
4.
Remove the REAR FRAME from the two hooks of the frame.
If the optional Large Format Scanner Stand is attached, take care not to drop screws inside the stand because there are holes for accessing screws.
Left Sensor Fixing Plate Right Sensor Fixing Plate Hook
1.
Remove the two screws, and remove the Left Sensor Fixing Plate and the Right Sensor Fixing Plate.
Hook A
A
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs 2.
Release the cables from the clamp.
3.
Remove the seven screws.
B
B) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 6 pcs
C
C) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 1 pcs
B
B
B
B
B
Tighten the screws in the order shown in below. Clamp REAR FRAME 1 7
3 2
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Cable
4 6
REAR FRAME
Figure 3-194. Removing the REAR FRAME
5
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
251 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.3 LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR 1.
Remove the LEFT COVER. (p256)
2.
Disengage the two hooks, and remove the sensor.
3.
Disconnect the cable from the connector.
LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR Hooks
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-195. Removing the LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
252 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.4 RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR
3.
Disengage the two hooks, and remove the sensor.
1.
Remove the Right Sensor Fixing Plate. (p251)
4.
Disconnect the cable from the connector.
2.
Remove the two screws, and remove the Right Upper Frame. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs Hooks RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR Right Upper Frame
A
A
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-197. Removing the RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR Figure 3-196. Removing the Right Upper Frame
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
253 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.9.5 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR
C A U T IO N
1.
Remove the RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p257)
2.
Remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY. (p271)
3.
Remove the two screws that secure the ATC Lever Cover. A) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs
Revision A
4.
In the following step, do not pull the ATC Lever Cover carelessly too far because the sensor cable is connected.
Disengage the three hooks, and remove the ATC Lever Cover. ATC Lever Cover
ATC Lever Cover
Hook
A
A Hook Hook
Figure 3-199. Removing the ATC Lever Cover (2)
Figure 3-198. Removing the ATC Lever Cover (1)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
254 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 5.
Revision A
Remove the screw, and remove the Sensor Cover.
6.
Disengage the four hooks, and remove the sensor.
B) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 1 pcs
7.
Disconnect the cable from the connector.
Sensor Cover 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR Cable
B
Connector
Back side
Hooks
Hooks
Figure 3-200. Removing the 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR (1)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Figure 3-201. Removing the 2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR (2)
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
255 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.9.6 LEFT COVER/LEFT LOWER COVER 1.
Revision A 2.
Remove the two screws, and remove the LEFT LOWER COVER. C) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs
Remove the five screw, and remove the LEFT COVER. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 3 pcs B) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs
LEFT LOWER COVER
Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 3-202.
C C
B 5
LEFT COVER
A 2
A 3
A 1
Figure 3-203. Removing the LEFT LOWER COVER
B 4
Figure 3-202. Removing the LEFT COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
256 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.9.7 RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER C A U T IO N
1.
Revision A 2.
Remove the three screws, and remove the RIGHT LOWER COVER. B) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs
Do not remove the Left Flange Guide.
C) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 1 pcs
Remove the two screws, and remove the Right Flange Guide. RIGHT LOWER COVER
A) Silver M3x8 S-tite screw: 2 pcs Screw the Right Flange Guide while pressing it to the rear.
B
C B
Right Flange Guide
Figure 3-205. Removing the RIGHT LOWER COVER Left Flange Guide A
A
Figure 3-204. Removing the Right Flange Guide
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
257 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 3.
Revision A
Remove the four screws that secure the LIGHT COVER. D) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 4 pcs
RIGHT REAR COVER
RIGHT COVER
Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 3-206. D 2
4.
Remove the RIGHT COVER while pressing the RIGHT REAR COVER to the rear. C H E C K P O IN T
D 1 D 3
If you find it difficult to remove the cover, remove the two Hex screws beforehand. D 4
Hex screws
Figure 3-206. Removing the RIGHT COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
258 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.8 RIGHT REAR COVER 1.
Remove the REAR FRAME. (p251)
2.
Remove the three screws, and remove the RIGHT REAR COVER. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 3 pcs Tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 3-207.
RIGHT REAR COVER
A 1
A 2
A 3
Figure 3-207. Removing the RIGHT REAR COVER
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
259 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.9 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY 1.
Remove the REAR FRAME. (p251)
2.
Remove the two Extension Spring.
3.
Remove the 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY toward you.
Extension Spring
Extension Spring
2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY
Figure 3-208. Removing the 2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
260 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.10 SUB-C BOARD 1.
Remove the REAR FRAME. (p251)
2.
Remove the RIGHT REAR COVER. (p259)
3.
Disconnect the all cables from the connectors of the SUB-C BOARD.
4.
Remove the four screws, and remove the SUB-C BOARD. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 4 pcs
Screw together
SUB-C BOARD
A
A
A
A
Figure 3-209. Removing the SUB-C BOARD
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
261 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.11 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR 1.
Remove the FRONT FRAME. (p250)
2.
Remove the RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p257)
3.
Remove the REAR FRAME. (p251)
4.
Remove the RIGHT REAR COVER. (p259)
5.
Remove the two screws, and remove the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR.
A A
A) Silver M2.6x4 S-tite screw: 2 pcs 6.
Remove the Motor Cover.
7.
Disconnect the cable from the connector.
2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR
Motor Cover
Cable Connector
Figure 3-210. Removing the 2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
262 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.9.12 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR 1.
Remove the REAR FRAME. (p251)
2.
Remove the RIGHT REAR COVER. (p259)
Revision A 6.
Remove the two screws, and remove the Sensor Holder. B) Silver M3x8 Cup P-tite screw: 2 pcs
7.
Remove the Motor Cover.
3. Remove the 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B. (p267) 4.
Remove the screw that secures the Motor Frame. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 1 pcs
5.
Sensor Holder
Disengage the Motor Frame from the hook, and remove the Motor Frame.
B Motor Cover
Motor Frame A B
2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR
Figure 3-212. Removing the Sensor Holder
Hook
Figure 3-211. Removing the Motor Frame
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
263 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 8.
Revision A
Remove the two screws, and remove 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR. C) Silver M2.6x4 S-tite screw: 2 pcs
9.
Disconnect the cable from the connector.
C C
2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-213. Removing the 2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
264 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.13 2nd ATC MOTOR 1.
Remove the RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p257)
2. Remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY. (p271) 3.
Remove the two screws, and remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR. A) Silver M3x6 S-tite screw with built-in spring washer: 2 pcs
2nd ATC MOTOR
A
A
Figure 3-214. Removing the 2nd ATC MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
265 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.14 2nd PF SENSOR
3.
Disengage the four hooks, and remove the sensor.
1.
Remove the FRONT FRAME. (p250)
4.
Disconnect the cable from the connector.
2.
Remove the two screws, and remove the Sensor Cover. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs
2nd PF SENSOR Connector Cable
Sensor Cover
Back side
A
Hooks Hooks
A
Figure 3-215. Removing the Sensor Cover
Figure 3-216. Removing the 2nd PF SENSOR
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
266 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.15 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B
Hole
1. Remove the REAR FRAME. (p251) 2.
Remove the RIGHT REAR COVER. (p259)
3.
Rotate the Sensor Cover until the hole comes on the top.
4.
Remove the Plastic ring, and remove the Sensor Cover and the parallel pin.
C A U T IO N
Sensor Cover
Plastic ring
Be careful not to drop the parallel pin.
Parallel pin
Figure 3-217. Removing the Sensor Cover
5.
Disengage the eight hooks (four each), and remove the 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B.
6.
Disconnect the cable from the connector.
Connector
Hooks Hooks
Cable
2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR B Connector
Cable
Hooks Hooks 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A
Figure 3-218. Removing the 2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
267 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
3.4.9.16 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR C A U T IO N
Pay attention to the positioning points (See below figure).
If the optional Large Format Scanner Stand is attached, take care not to drop screws inside the stand because there are holes for accessing screws.
1.
Remove the REAR COVER. (p221)
2.
Remove the LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE (Full side). (p231)
3.
Remove the REAR FRAME. (p251)
4.
Remove the RIGHT REAR COVER. (p259)
C A U T IO N
Revision A
Lower Paper Guide
Positioning points
In the following step, do not pull the Lower Paper Guide carelessly too far because the sensor cable is connected. Positioning points
5.
Remove the two screws, and remove the Lower Paper Guide. A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs
Lower Paper Guide
A
A
Figure 3-219. Removing the Lower Paper Guide
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
268 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 6.
Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN7) of the SUB-C BOARD.
Revision A 7.
Disconnect the cable from the connector.
8.
Disengage the four hooks, and remove the sensor.
Cable CN1 CN7 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR
SUB-C BOARD
Cable
Connector
Figure 3-220. Removing the 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR (1) Back side Hooks
Hooks
Figure 3-221. Removing the 2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR (2)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
269 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.17 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY 1.
Remove the RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p257)
2.
Remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY. (p271)
3.
Remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR. (p265)
2nd ATC GEAR ASSY
Figure 3-222. Removing the 2nd ATC GEAR ASSY
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
270 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
3.4.9.18 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY 1.
Remove the RIGHT COVER/RIGHT LOWER COVER. (p257)
2.
Move the ATC Lever in the direction of the arrow.
2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY
ATC Lever
A
A
Connector Motor Cover
C A U T IO N
So as not to let the 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY, hold the 2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY when removing it.
Cable
3.
Remove the two screws, and remove the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY and the 2nd SHAFT ASSY.
2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY
2nd ATC MOTOR
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 2 pcs 4.
Remove the Motor Cover.
5.
Disconnect the cable from the connector of the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY. 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY
Figure 3-223. Removing the 2nd ATC MOTOR ASSY/2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly Procedure
271 Confidential
CHAPTER
4
ADJUSTMENT
Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.1 Overview This chapter describes the Service Program software utility and the adjustment procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts.
4.1.1 Precautions Always observe the following cautions whenever making an adjustment on the printer. C A U T IO N
Always refer to "4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part" (p.274) and make sure to perform all the adjustments listed in the table in the given order. Always read and follow the precautions given in each section that explains each adjustment. Ignoring the precautions can result in malfunction of the printer.
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
273 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part The following table shows the required adjustments by repaired or replaced part and the order in which the adjustments must be performed. Note "*1": The adjustments required for the MAIN BOARD differs depending on whether the NVRAM on the old board can be backed up or not. "*2": When the firmware update is required, first check the version of firmware currently installed on the printer, then update the firmware if necessary. "*3": PGPP: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) Matte Paper: Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper "*4": Perform only after performing the following adjustments. • Head inclination adjustment (CR direction) • Head slant adjustment (PF direction) • PG adjustment
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Replacement
CR MOTOR CR related parts/units
CR SCALE
ADJUSTMENT
Service Program
Required Operations
After replacement
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
Page
p. 178
1 2
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
3
Reset the motor counter.
√
√
---
4
Power off
---
√
---
5
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
√
6
CR Belt Tension Check
√
√
√
p. 311
7
CR Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
8
CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic)
√
√
---
p. 317
9
Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 315
10
Auto Uni-d adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 318
11
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and deceleration correction
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 319
12
PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
√
Matte paper
√
---
p. 320
Tensimeter U-507
p. 307
p. 170
Replacement
1
After replacement
2
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
√
3
CR Scale Check
√
√
√
Overview
p. 316
274 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Replacement
CR related parts/units
After replacement
Media
Replaced Reattached
Page
p. 176 Turn the power on in normal mode.
--Tensimeter U-507
√
√
√
√
p. 311
3
CR Belt Tension Check
√
4
APG function check
√
√
√
p. 314
5
CR Scale Check
√
√
√
p. 316
6
CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic)
√
√
√
p. 317
7
Head inclination check & adjustment (CR direction)
√
√
√
p. 330
8
Head slant check & adjustment (PF direction)
√
√
√
p. 333
9
Power off
---
√
√
10
PG check & adjustment
---
11
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
12
Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment
√
√
√
√*4
√*4
PGPP
√*4
√*4
p. 315
√*4
p. 318
Thickness gauge
p. 322
13
Auto Uni-d adjustment
√
PGPP
√*4
14
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and deceleration correction
√
PGPP
√*4
√*4
p. 319
15
PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
√
Matte paper
√*4
√*4
p. 320
PGPP
√*4
√*4
p. 344
16
ADJUSTMENT
Jig
1 2
CR TIMING BELT/ CR ENCODER/ PW SENSOR/ IM SENSOR
Service Program
Required Operations
Cut Position Check & Adjustment
Overview
√
275 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Replacement
After replacement
CR related parts/units
APG UNIT (APG Motor)
ADJUSTMENT
After replacement
Media
Replaced Reattached
Page
p. 193 Turn the power on in normal mode.
--Tensimeter U-507
√
√
√
√
p. 311
3
CR Belt Tension Check
√
4
APG function check
√
√
√
p. 314
5
CR Scale Check
√
√
√
p. 316
6
CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic)
√
√
√
p. 317
7
Head inclination check & adjustment (CR direction)
√
√
√
p. 330
8
Head slant check & adjustment (PF direction)
√
√
√
p. 333
9
Power off
---
√
√
10
PG check & adjustment
---
11
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
12
Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment
√
Thickness gauge
PGPP
√
√
√
√*4
√
√*4
p. 315 p. 318
p. 322
13
Auto Uni-d adjustment
√
PGPP
√
√*4
14
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and deceleration correction
√
PGPP
√
√*4
p. 319
15
PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
√
Matte paper
√
√*4
p. 320
√
√*4
p. 344
Cut Position Check & Adjustment
√
2
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
3
Reset the motor counter.
√
√
---
4
Power off
---
√
---
5
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
6
APG function check
√
√
---
16
Replacement
Jig
1 2
CR UNIT
Service Program
Required Operations
PGPP
p. 181
1
Overview
p. 307
p. 314
276 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Before replacement Replacement
Head related
PRINT HEAD After replacement
Replacement Ink supply related parts/units
PUMP CAP UNIT
ADJUSTMENT
Service Program
Required Operations
After replacement
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
1
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
√
2
Tube inner pressure reduction
√
√
√
3
Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side & power off
√
√
√
Page
p. 325
p. 162
4 5
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
6
Reset the Print Head Counter.
√
√
---
p. 307
7
Head ID Input & power off
√
√
---
p. 326
8
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
√
9
Cleaning
√
10
Nozzle Check
√
11
Head inclination check & adjustment (CR direction)
√
12
Head slant check & adjustment (PF direction)
√
13
Power off
---
14
PG check & adjustment
---
√
√
√
√*4
PGPP
Thickness gauge
√
√
p. 329
√
√
p. 328
√
√
p. 330
√
√
p. 333
√
√ p. 322
15
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
16
Auto Uni-d adjustment
√
PGPP
√
√*4
p. 318
17
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and deceleration correction
√
PGPP
√
√*4
p. 319 p. 184
1 2
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
3
Reset the unit counter.
√
√
---
4
Power off
---
√
---
5
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
6
Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
Overview
p. 307
p. 359
277 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Before replacement IC HOLDER Replacement After replacement Ink supply related parts/units Before replacement INK TUBE Replacement After replacement
ADJUSTMENT
Service Program
Required Operations
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
√
---
√
√
---
---
√
---
---
√
√
Ink eject & pressure reduction
√
√
√
Power off
---
√
√
1
Turn the power on in normal mode.
2
Reset the IC Holder counter.
3
Power off
4
Turn the power on in normal mode.
5 6
---
Page
p. 307
p. 337 p. 185
7 8
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
√
9
Initial ink charge
√
√
√
10
Cleaning
√
11
Nozzle Check
√
1
Turn the power on in normal mode.
2
p. 339
√
√
p. 329
√
√
p. 328
---
√
---
Reset the tube counter.
√
√
---
PGPP
3
Power off
---
√
---
4
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
√
5
Ink eject & pressure reduction
√
√
√
6
Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side & power off
---
√
√
7
p. 337
p. 189
---
8
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
√
9
Initial ink charge
√
√
√
10
Cleaning
√
11
Nozzle Check
√
Overview
p. 307
PGPP
p. 339
√
√
p. 329
√
√
p. 328
278 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Before replacement Ink supply related parts/units
DAMPER KIT Replacement After replacement Replacement
PF TIMING BELT
After replacement
Replacement Paper feed related parts/units
PF MOTOR
ADJUSTMENT
Service Program
Required Operations
After replacement
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
√
---
√
√
---
---
√
---
---
√
√
Tube inner pressure reduction
√
√
√
Auto CR unlock & move CR to full column side & power off
√
√
√
1
Turn the power on in normal mode.
2
Reset the damper kit counter.
3
Power off
4
Turn the power on in normal mode.
5 6
---
Page
p. 307
p. 325
p. 156
7 8
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
9
Cleaning
√
10
Nozzle Check
√
√ PGPP
√
√
√
p. 329
√
√
p. 328 p. 205
1
√
√
2
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
3
PF Belt Tension check
√
√
√
p. 340
4
Media Feed Auto Adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 343
5
PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
√
Matte paper
√
---
p. 320
6
Cut Position Check & Adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 344
2
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
3
Reset the motor counter.
√
√
---
4
Power off
---
√
---
5
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
√
6
PF Belt Tension check
√
√
√
p. 340
7
PF Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
8
Media Feed Auto Adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 343
9
PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
√
Matte paper
√
---
p. 320
10
Cut Position Check & Adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 344
Tensimeter U-507
p. 200
1
Overview
Tensimeter U-507
p. 307
279 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
PF ENCODER/ PF SCALE
CUTTER UNIT (cutter motor)
Replaced Reattached
2
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
√
3
PC Scale Check
√
√
√
Replacement
1
After replacement
After replacement
After replacement
Page
p. 203
After replacement
Replacement
ADJUSTMENT
Media
1
Replacement
ATC MOTOR (2nd)
Jig
Replacement
Paper feed related parts/units
ATC MOTOR (1st)
Service Program
Required Operations
p. 342 p. 232
√
---
√
√
---
---
√
---
---
√
---
Cutter motor measurement
√
√
---
p. 359
Cut Position Check & Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 344
2
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
3
Reset the motor counter.
4
Power off
5
Turn the power on in normal mode.
6 7
---
PGPP
p. 307
p. 212
1 2
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
3
Reset the motor counter.
√
√
---
4
Power off
---
√
---
p. 307 p. 265
1 2
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
3
Reset the motor counter.
√
√
---
4
Power off
---
√
---
Overview
p. 307
280 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Before replacement
Replacement
Board related parts/units
Main Board (NVRAM backup OK & HDD/PS none)*1
After replacement
ADJUSTMENT
Service Program
Required Operations
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
1
Print Cover Open
---
√
---
2
Remove ink cartridges / maintenance boxes.
---
√
---
3
Turn the power on in Serviceman mode.
---
√
---
4
NVRAM Backup tool (Read)
√
√
---
5
Power off
---
√
---
7
Turn the power on in Firmware update mode.
---
√
---
8
Model Selection (at service program)
√
√
---
√
√
---
Page
p. 297 p. 145
6
firmware.*2
9
Update the off)
(automatically power
10
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
11
NVRAM Clear OK
---
√
---
12
Main Board initial setting (automatically power off)
√
√
---
13
Turn the power on in Firmware update mode.
---
√
---
14
NVRAM Backup tool (Write)
√
√
---
15
Turn the power off.
---
√
---
16
Print Cover Close
---
√
---
17
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
18
Model Selection (at service program)
√
√
---
19
RTC check & adjustment.
√
√
---
p. 350
20
Reset the Main Board exchange counter.
√
√
---
p. 354
Overview
p. 305
p. 349
p. 297
281 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Board related parts/units
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Main Board (NVRAM backup NG & HDD/PS none)*1
ADJUSTMENT
Service Program
Required Operations
Before replacement
1
Replacement
2
After replacement
Print Cover Open
---
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
√
Page
---
p. 145
3
Turn the power on in Firmware update mode.
---
√
---
4
Model Selection (at service program)
√
√
---
√
√
---
firmware.*2(automatically
5
Update the off)
6
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
7
NVRAM Clear OK
---
√
---
8
Main Board initial setting (automatically power off)
√
√
---
9
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
10
Initial Ink Charge Flag off.
√
√
---
p. 310
11
Rear AD Adjustment
---
√
---
p. 348
12
Head ID check & input (automatically power off)
√
√
---
p. 326
13
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
14
RTC check & adjustment
√
√
---
p. 350
15
MAC Address Input
√
√
---
p. 351
16
Serial Number & USB ID check & input
√
√
---
p. 352
17
Turn the power off.
---
√
---
18
Print Cover Close.
---
√
---
19
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
20
I/C Installation
---
√
---
21
FW Version Check
√
√
---
22
Suction Fan Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 355
23
APG function check
√
√
---
p. 314
24
PF Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
25
CR Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
Overview
power
p. 305
p. 349
282 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Main Board (NVRAM backup NG & HDD/PS none)*1
Board related parts/units
After replacement
Before replacement Replacement
Main Board (NVRAM backup OK & HDD/PS exist)*1 After replacement
ADJUSTMENT
Service Program
Required Operations
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
Page
26
CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic)
√
√
---
27
Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
28
Cleaning
√
√
---
p. 329
29
Nozzle Check
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 328
30
Media Feed Auto Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 343
31
Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 315
32
Auto Uni-d adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 318
33
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and deceleration correction
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 319
34
PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
√
Matte paper
√
---
p. 320
35
CUT Motor Measurement
√
√
---
p. 359
36
Cut Position Check & Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 344
37
Reset the Main Board exchange counter.
√
√
---
p. 354
1
Print Cover Open
---
√
---
2
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
3
NVRAM Backup tool (Read)
√
√
---
4
Turn the power off.
---
√
---
PGPP
p. 297 p. 145
5 6
Turn the power on in Firmware update mode.
---
√
---
7
Model Selection (at service program)
√
√
---
√
√
---
firmware.*2(automatically
8
Update the off)
9
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
10
NVRAM Clear OK
---
√
---
11
Main Board initial setting (automatically power off)
√
√
---
12
Turn the power on in Firmware update mode.
---
√
---
13
NVRAM Backup tool (Write)
√
√
---
14
Turn the power off.
---
√
---
Overview
power
p. 305
p. 349
p. 297
283 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Main Board (NVRAM backup OK & HDD/PS exist)*1
After replacement
ADJUSTMENT
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
HDD Unit/PS Unit connection
---
√
---
16
Print Cover Close
---
√
---
17
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
18
Model Selection (at service program)
√
√
---
19
RTC check & adjustment
√
√
---
p. 350 p. 354
20
Reset the Main Board exchange counter.
√
√
---
1
Print Cover Open
---
√
---
Replacement
2
After replacement
Page
15
Before replacement
Board related parts/units Main Board (NVRAM backup NG & HDD/PS exist)*1
Service Program
Required Operations
p. 145
3
Turn the power on in Firmware update mode.
---
√
---
4
Model Selection (at service program)
√
√
---
5
Update the firmware.*2(automatically power off)
√
√
---
p. 305
6
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
7
NVRAM Clear OK
---
√
---
8
Main Board initial setting (automatically power off)
√
√
---
9
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
10
Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information write to NVRAM
√
√
---
p. 353
11
Initial Ink Charge Flag off
√
√
---
p. 310
12
Rear AD Adjustment
---
√
---
p. 348
13
Head ID Input (automatically power off)
√
√
---
p. 326
14
Turn the power on in serviceman mode.
---
√
---
15
RTC check & adjustment
√
√
---
p. 350
16
MAC Address Input
√
√
---
p. 351
17
Serial Number & USB ID check & input
√
√
---
p. 352
18
Turn the power off.
---
√
---
19
Print Cover Close
---
√
---
20
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
Overview
p. 349
284 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Board related parts/units
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Main Board (NVRAM backup NG & HDD exist)*1
ADJUSTMENT
Service Program
Required Operations
After replacement
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
Page
21
I/C Installation
---
√
---
22
FW Version Check
√
√
---
23
Suction Fan Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 355
24
APG function check
√
√
---
p. 314
25
PF Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
26
CR Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
27
CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic)
√
√
---
p. 317
28
Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
29
Cleaning
√
√
---
p. 329
30
Nozzle Check
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 328
31
Media Feed Auto Adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 343
32
Ink Mark Sensor check & auto adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 315
33
Auto Uni-d adjustment
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 318
34
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and deceleration correction
√
PGPP
√
---
p. 319
35
PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
√
Matte paper
√
---
p. 320
36
CUT Motor Measurement
√
√
---
p. 359
37
Cut Position check & adjustment
√
√
---
p. 344
38
Reset the Main Board exchange counter.
√
√
---
p. 354
Overview
PGPP
285 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part Class
Replaced or Repaired (Reattached) Part/Unit
Replacement
Board related parts/units
Others
PSH BOARD (Power Supply Board)
SUCTION FAN
ADJUSTMENT
Service Program
Required Operations
After replacement
Jig
Media
Replaced Reattached
Page
p. 151
1 2
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
3
CR Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
4
PF Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
5
Pump Cap Unit Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
√
√
---
p. 359
6
CUT Motor Measurement
√
√
---
p. 359
7
Make the replacement date & time setting.
√
√
---
p. 354 p. 237
Replacement
1
After replacement
2
Turn the power on in normal mode.
---
√
---
3
Suction Fan Adjustment
√
√
---
Overview
p. 355
286 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.1.3 Adjustment Items The following table describes the general outline of the adjustments. Table 4-2. Adjustment Items Class
Service Program
Jig
When the belt tension is out of standards, the following symptoms may occur. Belt tension is high: The life of the belt will be shortened. High load applied to the carriage causes frequent wait control over the carriage Apply a specified tension to the CR TIMING movements to prevent overheating. If the Normal BELT. Measure the tension of the belt using the CR Belt Tension Check tension is too high, the shaft of the motor leans mode sonic tensimeter to check if it is within standards. and the brush in the motor becomes worn, and If not, adjust the tension. will result in CR overload error. Belt tension is low: The belt teeth slip and the carriage swings. The correction by the active damper does not work and the bands (vertical bands) occur near the side edges of paper.
√
Tensimeter U-507
Rotates the APG motor to change the PG, and see When the PG is not switched properly responding Normal if the PG is correctly set to its home position to the print setting, low image quality or CL mode (TYP). operation abnormality may occur.
√
Adjustment Items
APG function check
Overview
Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed
Printer Mode
Media
Page
p. 311
p. 314
Checks if the IM SENSOR has any trouble/
CR related
connection failure. Executes IMS Position Auto Correction
(pattern detecting position correction). If the IMS does not work properly, automatic Ink Mark Sensor check Corrects the detecting position of the print Normal adjustments such as Auto Bi-D Adjustment cannot pattern in the sub scan direction and the main & Auto Adjustment mode be executed normally. scan direction. Runs the nozzle check to check if the IM SENSOR detects the nozzle clogging properly.
√
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
p. 315
CR Scale Check
Checks the CR SCALE for any abnormality such When the CR SCALE is not read properly, the as damage or dirt and checks if the scale can be carriage will not operate normally. properly read by the encoder.
Normal mode
√
p. 316
CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic)
Calibrates the active damper. Because the motor vibration/carriage vibration * Active damper is a function to reduce the carriage vibration which causes vertical bands cannot be reduced, vertical bands may appear on on prints by outputting waveforms which have prints. phases opposite to the motor vibration.
Normal mode
√
p. 317
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
287 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 4-2. Adjustment Items
Class
Adjustment Items
Overview
The CR MOTOR is designed to stop when the amount of heat generation (motor temperature) during motor operation reaches a predetermined limit. The amount of heat generation is estimated CR Motor Measurement based on the electrical characteristics of the & Automatic motor, which vary by motor and power supply of Adjustment the printer. Therefore, to get the motor control to work properly, the electrical characteristics values of the motor need to be measured and stored in the memory on the MAIN BOARD.
Auto Uni-d adjustment
Reduces misalignment of ink droplets fired to paper during unidirectional printing. Auto Bi-d adjustment: Reduces misalignment
CR related
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and deceleration correction
of ink droplets fired to paper during bidirectional printing. Acceleration and deceleration correction: To improve print quality for bidirectional printing, corrects the movement speed of the CR UNIT.
Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed
If this adjustment is not made, the estimation of the motor temperature cannot be made properly and may cause the following symptoms. Even though there is no problem with the motor temperature, the printer pauses during printing because it judges that the motor is in high-temperature state. Despite the motor is in a high-temperature state, a lower motor temperature is estimated and the printer does not stop. This may cause the printer to malfunction. If this adjustment is not made, print quality problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, banding may occur.
Printer Mode
Normal mode
Normal mode
Service Program
Normal mode
Media
√
Page
p. 359
√
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
p. 318
√
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
p. 319
√
Archival Matte Paper/ Enhanced Matte Paper
p. 320
Auto Bi-d adjustment: If this adjustment is not
made, print quality problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, banding may occur. If this adjustment is not made, print quality problems may occur.
Jig
PW: Checks that the PW sensor detects the
PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
ADJUSTMENT
edges of paper correctly. Feed A4 matte paper from the paper cassette and perform the detection operation using the Service Program. T&B&S: Adjusts the print start position of the top, bottom, right and left edges of paper. Feed A4 matte paper from the paper cassette and print the adjustment patterns using the Service Program. Measure the adjustment patterns then input the measurement result. The print start position is automatically adjusted.
If this adjustment is not made, the width or length of paper cannot be detected correctly. As the Normal result, misaligned print position or insufficient mode blank space may occur, or printed images may be broken.
Overview
288 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 4-2. Adjustment Items
Class
CR related
Service Program
Jig
Normal mode
---
Thickness gauge
Normal mode
√
p. 325
Head ID Input
If the new ID is not registered after replacing the head, the head ID of the older head is used and the Register the head rank ID to the printer using the proper drive voltage cannot be set. The following Service Program or check the currently registered symptoms may occur. head rank ID. Head rank ID is information Since the amount of ink droplets is not proper, Normal needed to drive the PRINT HEAD with proper the color and density abnormalities are found mode voltages so that proper amount of ink droplets are on prints. fired. The ID is assigned to each head and listed Since the amount of ink droplets turns to be on the label on the head. unstable, dot missing or misaligned dots occur while printing or flushing.
√
p. 326
Nozzle Check
When the Nozzle Check is not executed and the nozzle is clogging, the following symptoms may occur. Print the pattern on which the nozzle discharging The adjustment pattern is not printed properly condition can be checked from the Service and it causes a trouble for the automatic and Program. visual check/adjustment. The automatic adjustments may fail or end with an error.
Normal mode
√
Cleaning
When the cleaning is not executed, the following symptoms may occur. Nozzle clogging is not solved and the printing cannot be executed properly. Normal Specify the power and the color from the Service Ink droplets are not fired and nothing is printed mode Program and execute the head cleaning. after the PRINT HEAD is replaced to a new one. (Executing Initial ink charge may solve this problem but it takes time and consumes lots of ink.)
√
Adjustment Items
Overview
Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed
PG check & adjustment
Adjust the platen gap of the CR UNIT using the thickness gauge.
When the PG is out of standards, the following symptoms may occur. Gap is too wide: Unstable ink droplet paths or misaligned dots occur, and it causes low printing quality such as banding, printing misalignment, or grainy image. Gap is too narrow: The head rubs paper.
Tube inner pressure reduction
Reduce the pressure in the ink flow paths. Doing this Removing a part or a unit which is needed to prevents ink leakage that can occur when removing the reduce the pressure without reducing causes ink PRINT HEAD or other ink related parts/units. leakage.
Head related
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
Printer Mode
Media
Page
p. 322
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
p. 328
p. 329
289 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 4-2. Adjustment Items
Class
Adjustment Items
Overview
Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed
Printer Mode
APG function check
Refer to CR related.
Head inclination check & adjustment (CR direction)
Corrects inclination of the PRINT HEAD in the CR direction. Auto adjustment An adjustment pattern is printed and the IM SENSOR scans the pattern. Based on the scanned result, a number of steps to move the cam for the adjustment is displayed. Turn the cam the number of steps to correct the head inclination. Manual adjustment Print an adjustment pattern, and visually check the pattern to see if the adjustment is needed. To correct the head inclination, turn the cam.
If this adjustment is not made, print quality problems such as misaligned lines, grainy image, banding, or color unevenness may occur in the scale of PRINT HEAD surface area.
Head slant check & adjustment (PF direction)
Corrects slant of the PRINT HEAD in the PF direction. Auto adjustment An adjustment pattern is printed and the IM SENSOR scans the pattern. Based on the scanned result, a number of steps to move the lever for the adjustment is displayed. Move the lever the number of steps to correct the head slant. Manual adjustment Print an adjustment pattern, and visually check the pattern to see if the adjustment is needed. To correct the head slant, move the lever.
If this adjustment is not made, the gap between the PRINT HEAD surface and paper is kept uneven (e.g.: the gap at the front side is wider than that at Normal the rear side), and causes irregularity in size and mode position of printed dots. This may be observed as print quality problems such as grainy image, banding, or color unevenness.
Auto Uni-d adjustment
Refer to CR related.
Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and deceleration correction
Refer to CR related.
Head related
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
Normal mode
Service Program
Jig
Media
Page
√
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
p. 330
√
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
p. 333
290 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 4-2. Adjustment Items
Class
Ink supply related
Adjustment Items
Overview
Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed
Printer Mode
Service Program
Jig
Media
Page
Ink eject & pressure reduction
Discharge ink from the printer.
If ink is not discharged when instructed to do so Serviceman before removing parts or units, ink may leak from Mode the printer and contaminate surroundings.
Tube inner cleaning
Clean the ink flow paths to resolve the solidified ink in the paths and clogging of nozzles of the PRINT HEAD. Or, when leaving the printer unused for a long period, doing this in advance can prevent ink from getting solidified. Use the Cleaning Cartridge for service and the Service Program.
If the printer is left unused for a long period without doing this after discharging ink, the ink Normal left in the ink flow paths may get solidified. Once mode the ink becomes solidified, charging new ink may become impossible or dot missing may occur.
√
Initial ink charge
Charge ink in the ink flow paths. Execute from the Service Program.
If this is not executed after discharging ink, air bubbles will remain in the ink tubes and may cause dot missing.
Serviceman Mode
√
p. 339
Main Unit Measurement & Automatic Adjustment
The pump cap motor is designed to stop when the amount of heat generation (motor temperature) during motor operation reaches a predetermined limit. The amount of heat generation is estimated based on the electrical characteristics of the motor, which vary by motor and power supply of the printer. Therefore, to get the motor control to work properly, the electrical characteristics values of the motor need to be measured and stored in the memory on the MAIN BOARD.
If this adjustment is not made, the estimation of the motor temperature cannot be made properly and may cause the following symptoms. Even though there is no problem with the motor temperature, the printer pauses during printing because it judges that the motor is in high-temperature state. Despite the motor is in a high-temperature state, a lower motor temperature is estimated and the printer does not stop. This may cause the printer to malfunction.
Normal mode
√
p. 359
When the belt tension is out of standards, the following symptoms may occur. Belt tension is high: The life of the belt will be shortened. High load applied to the PF Apply a specified tension to the PF TIMING MOTOR causes frequent wait controls during Normal BELT. Measure the tension of the belt using the paper feeding to prevent overheating. If the mode sonic tensimeter to check if it is within standards. tension is too high, the shaft of the motor leans If not, adjust the tension. and the brush in the motor becomes worn, and will result in PF motor overload error. Belt tension is low: The belt teeth slip and paper cannot be fed properly.
√
Media Feed PF Belt Tension check related
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
√
p. 337
Cleaning
cartridge Maintenance
p. 338
Box
Tensimeter U-507
p. 340
291 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 4-2. Adjustment Items
Class
Adjustment Items
PC Scale Check
Media Feed Auto Adjustment
Overview
Check the PF SCALE for any abnormality such as damage or dirt and check if the scale can be properly read by the encoder using the Service Program.
ADJUSTMENT
Printer Mode
When the PF SCALE is not read properly, paper Normal feeding may become impossible and an error may mode occur.
Adjust the paper feeding amount which varies by If paper feeding accuracy lowers, print quality printer. The adjustment is made automatically. problems such as banding may occur.
The PF MOTOR is designed to stop when the amount of heat generation (motor temperature) during motor operation reaches a predetermined Media Feed limit. The amount of heat generation is estimated PF Motor Measurement related based on the electrical characteristics of the & Automatic motor, which vary by motor and power supply of Adjustment the printer. Therefore, to get the motor control to work properly, the electrical characteristics values of the motor need to be measured and stored in the memory on the MAIN BOARD.
Cut Position Check & Adjustment
Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed
If this adjustment is not made, the estimation of the motor temperature cannot be made properly and may cause the following symptoms. Even though there is no problem with the motor temperature, the printer pauses during printing because it judges that the motor is in high-temperature state. Despite the motor is in a high-temperature state, a lower motor temperature is estimated and the printer does not stop. This may cause the printer to malfunction.
Adjust the auto cut with the auto cutter to cut paper at the proper position. Feed the roll paper and execute printing and cutting of the adjustment pattern using the Service Program. The cut position may be misaligned. Measuring the gap between the bottom edge of the printed paper and the pattern and inputting the measurement result adjusts the cut position.
Overview
Service Program
Jig
Media
Page
p. 342
√ Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Normal mode
√
Normal mode
√
p. 359
Normal mode
√
p. 344
p. 343
292 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 4-2. Adjustment Items
Class
Adjustment Items
Overview
Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed
Printer Mode
PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
Refer to CR related.
CUT Motor Measurement
The cutter motor is designed to stop when the amount of heat generation (motor temperature) during motor operation reaches a predetermined limit. The amount of heat generation is estimated based on the electrical characteristics of the motor, which vary by motor and power supply of the printer. Therefore, to get the motor control to work properly, the electrical characteristics values of the motor need to be measured and stored in the memory on the MAIN BOARD.
If this adjustment is not made, the estimation of the motor temperature cannot be made properly and may cause the following symptoms. Even though there is no problem with the motor temperature, the printer pauses during printing because it judges that the motor is in high-temperature state. Despite the motor is in a high-temperature state, a lower motor temperature is estimated and the printer does not stop. This may cause the printer to malfunction.
Paper thickness sensor adjustment
Adjust the installation position of the sensor so that the Paper thickness sensor detects the paper thickness correctly. Adjust the paper thickness sensor using the jig for paper thickness adjustment.
If this adjustment is not made, the thickness of the paper cannot be detected correctly. As the result, the PG is not set correctly against the paper thickness which is actually inserted. Serviceman Mode When the PG becomes wider: Low print quality such as unstable ink droplet paths or misaligned dots When the PG becomes narrower: Head rubbing
Rear AD Adjustment
Adjust the detection sensitivity of the PE SENSOR so that it can recognize the paper inserted in the printer correctly. Let the sensor detect the Standard Sheet (translucent media) which is hard to recognize to check the result on the Control Panel. (By using the media which is hard to recognize, paper can be recognized regardless of the environmental condition or the media)
If the adjustment is not executed, paper recognition failures may occur (e.g. paper empty Serviceman error occurs even with paper inserted, some media Mode are not recognized).
Media Feed related
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
Normal mode
Service Program
Jig
Media
Page
p. 359
√
---
Adjustment jig for paper thickness sensor
p. 346
---
Standard Sheet
p. 348
293 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A Table 4-2. Adjustment Items
Class
Boards Related
Overview
Symptoms that the Adjustment is Needed
Printer Mode
Service Program
NVRAM Backup/ Restore
Make a backup of data stored in the NVRAM or restore the data from a backup.
---
Serviceman Mode
√
p. 297
RTC check & adjustment
Check the current setting of the RTC. Write the correct information as needed.
If the adjustment is not executed, a maintenance error (RTC setting error).
Serviceman Mode
√
p. 350
MAC Address Input
Read and check the MAC address of the printer. Write a new MAC address as needed.
If the address is not input or a wrong address is set, a network connection trouble occurs.
Serviceman Mode
√
p. 351
Check the serial number and the USB ID
If the serial number is not input or a wrong
currently set to the printer. Write the correct information as needed. Sets the USB ID automatically.
number is set, it makes service management (such as the print/NVRAM) harder. USB recognition error occurs.
Serviceman Mode
√
p. 352
Serviceman Mode
√
p. 353
Adjustment Items
Serial Number & USB ID check & adjustment
Option HDD/PS Unit S/ Writes the serial numbers of the HDD Option N information Write to Unit and PC Option Unit in the NVRAM. NVRAM
If the serial number of the Option Unit is not written in the new MAIN BOARD, the user is prompted to initialize the hard disk.
Jig
Media
Page
Main Board Exchange Counter
Write the date and time when the MAIN BOARD If this is not made, correct service history is not is replaced to the NVRAM. recorded.
Normal mode
√
p. 354
Power Supply Unit Replacement Date & Time setting
Write the date and time when the Power Supply Board is replaced to the NVRAM.
Normal mode
√
p. 354
---
Normal mode
√
p. 355
Reset the panel settings to their defaults.
---
Normal mode
---
Reset the user job history.
---
Normal mode
√
Roll Unit Nip Release
Move the PPK Rollers on the 1st Roll Unit and The roller may be deteriorated when the printer is Normal 2nd Roll Unit to the release positions and release stored for a long time. mode nipping.
√
p. 357
LCD operation check
Check if the LCD on the Control Panel functions normally.
---
Serviceman Mode
---
p. 358
Buttons operation check
Check if the buttons on the Control Panel function normally.
---
Serviceman Mode
---
p. 358
If this is not made, correct service history is not recorded.
Suction Fan Adjustment Run an operation check of the SUCTION FAN.
Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset Others
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
p. 356
294 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.1.4 List of Tools/Software/Consumables for Adjustments The tables below show the tools required for adjusting this printer. Hardware Tools Table 4-3. Hardware Tools Jig Name
Part Number
Sonic tensimeter U-507
1294120
P-THICK sensor adjustment jig
1424364
Paper thickness sensor adjustment jig
1282355
Thickness Gauge Standard Sheet (JETRAS JP-D300S)
--1476228
Cleaning Cartridge
---
Calibrated Loupe
---
Ruler
---
Target Adjustment
Remarks
CR Belt Tension Adjustment
---
PF Belt Tension Adjustment Paper thickness sensor adjustment
0.5/0.6/0.8/1.0
PG Adjustment
2.5/2.8
Rear AD Adjustment
---
Tube Cleaning
---
CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment
---
Cut Position Check & Adjustment PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment
---
Cut Position Check & Adjustment
Software Tools Table 4-4. Software Tools Software Name Service Program
Part Number Supplied separately
Explanation Used for almost all of the required adjustments.
Printer Driver
---
---
Firmware
---
---
Remarks Use the latest program. Unless the Printer Driver is installed, the Service Program does not operate. ---
Consumables Table 4-5. Consumables Consumable Name
Part Number
Explanation
Remarks
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
---
Used for adjustments that require paper. (For more details, see 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part).
---
Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper
---
Used for adjustments that require paper. (For more details, see 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part).
---
Ink Cartridge
---
---
---
Maintenance Box
---
---
---
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
295 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations This section describes the basic operations of the Service Program. Save the Service Program on the desktop or directly under the C drive. If the storage location is deep in the hierarchy, some program tools may not work correctly.
C A U T IO N
System Requirements
OS:
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8
Interface:
USB, Network
Startup 1. 2. 3. 4.
Install the Printer Driver. Double-click the "servprog.exe". A screen that asks if you want to carry out the NVRAM Backup appears. Select Yes to start the NVRAM Backup tool, or select No to display the Service Program Menu screen. Select the printer you want to adjust from Model Selection, and start the adjustment. Figure 4-1. Service Program
ADJUSTMENT
Overview
296 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer Parameters stored in the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD are read/stored and written onto the other NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD using this menu. Also, the exported parameter information is displayed on the computer screen.
Revision A
4.2.2 NVRAM Write Procedure 1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
C A U T IO N
4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure
When the MAIN board are exchanged (NVRAM back up OK & HDD none / NVRAM back up OK & HDD exist), turn the printer ON in the F/W Update Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Load] + [Feed] + [Maintenance]
1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Select the printer you want to adjust from the Model selection box.
2.
Remove all the ink cartridges.
3.
Click [Get Information] on the NVRAM Read field to start reading the parameters.
3.
Start the Service Program and select NV-RAM BACKUP from the main menu.
4.
Select the printer you want to adjust from the Model selection box.
4.
To view the NVRAM information: Click [Display Information] to display another screen of the NVRAM Viewer. To store the NVRAM information: Click [Save]. The file is named as "serial number + acquisition date" automatically.
5.
Click [Open File] on the NVRAM Write field.
6.
Select the NVRAM file to write on the printer.
7.
Click [Write File] to start writing the parameters.
8.
When the writing is completed, exit the NV-RAM BACKUP tool.
9.
Turn the printer OFF.
Figure 4-2. [NV-RAM BACKUP] Screen
ADJUSTMENT
NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer
297 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.2.3 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation
DESCRIPTION
The following functions are provided.
Life Parts Operation History
1. 2. 3. 4.
Displays the Life Parts Operation History Displays the history how the printer has been used (Utilization History) Displays the Error History saved in the NVRAM Displays the Basic Information of the printer (such as the serial No. or the setting values)
1
PROCEDURE 1.
Click [Display Information] on the NVRAM Read field of the NV-RAM BACKUP screen. Another screen of the NVRAM Viewer will be displayed.
2.
Select the tab you want to check.
3.
Click [Save as CSV] to save the information shown in the selected tab as CSV file.
4.
Click [Print] to print the information shown in the selected tab.
5.
Click [Close] to close the screen.
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 4-3. [Life Parts Operation History] Screen
ADJUSTMENT
Total printed area. The unit is m2.
1
Total Print Dimension
2
Items
3
Current Value
Displays current values for each part or unit.
4
Limit
Displays the life limit of the part if it has.
5
Situation
Displays the percentage of Current Value (3) considering the Limit (4) as 100%.
6
End of Life Estimation (YY/ MM/DD)
The estimated date when the part or unit reaches the end of its service life.
NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer
---
298 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series Utilization History
Revision A Error History 1
2
3
5
4 6
1
Items
2
Current Value
ADJUSTMENT
8
2
Figure 4-4. [Utilization History] Screen 1
7
--Displays the current value per item.
Figure 4-5. [Error History] Screen 1
Number of Normal Errors
The number of occurrences of normal errors.
2
Type
Displays the types of the most recent six normal errors saved in the NVRAM.
3
Error Content
Information of the error.
4
Time Stamp
Displays the time stamps of the currently displayed errors.
5
Number of Service Calls
The number of occurrences of service call errors.
6
Type
Displays the types of the most recent six service call errors saved in the NVRAM.
7
Error Content
Information of the error.
8
Time Stamp
Displays the time stamps of the currently displayed errors.
NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer
299 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series Basic Information
Revision A
INFORMATION SAVED TO CSV FILES 1
Life Parts Operation History
2
Table 4-6. Life Parts Operation History Item
Description Total printed area. The unit is m2.
Total Print Dimension PRINT HEAD
Number of Shots/Line
DAMPER KIT
Buffer Counter
INK TUBE (CR pass count) Number of I/C Replacements IC HOLDER
Pump Counter (Operation Times)
Pump cap unit life counter Cut counter
Operation history (the following information is displayed for each of the items.) Current Value Limit Situation End of Life Estimation (YY/MM/ DD)
Utilization History Table 4-7. Utilization History 3
Item
4
Figure 4-6. [Basic Information] Screen 1
Serial Number
2
Data Acquisition Date
3
Items
4
Current Value
ADJUSTMENT
Cleanings (Counter to be reset)
Product serial number. The date and time when NVRAM data is acquired. --The current value of the item.
Cumulative CL Times (non rewritable)
NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer
Description
Print Head CL1s (Times)
---
Print Head CL2s (Times)
---
Print Head CL3s (Times)
---
Print Head SSCLs (Times)
---
Print Head CL1s (Times)
---
Print Head CL2s (Times)
---
Print Head CL3s (Times)
---
Print Head SSCLs (Times)
---
300 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 4-7. Utilization History Item
Cartridges
Power ON Time Print Ratio
ADJUSTMENT
Table 4-7. Utilization History Description
Item
Description
Power Saving Mode (Number of Times)
---
Time of Power Saving Mode
---
Distance of CR Movements (non rewritable)
---
Paper Size (Paper Width)
---
Print Pages in PW Detector OFF
---
---
APG Motor Replacement Times
---
Maintenance tank (Home) exchange history
---
APG Motor Replacement Date & Time
---
Maintenance tank (Full) exchange count (New)
---
ATC (Roll) Motor Replacement Times (Normal)
---
Maintenance tank (Full) exchange count (Accumulation)
---
---
ATC (Roll) Motor Replacement Date & Time CR Motor Replacement Times
---
CR Motor Replacement Date & Time
---
CR Motor Counter when Previous Replacement
---
Tube Replacement Times
---
Consumed Ink Amount (per 110ml)
---
Consumed Ink Amount (per 110ml)
---
Ink Cartridge Replacement History
---
Maintenance tank (Home) exchange count (New)
---
Maintenance tank (Home) exchange count (Accumulation)
Maintenance tank (Full) exchange history
---
Cutter blade exchange history
---
Power ON Time Print Ratio
PW Detection (Graph)
Parts Replacement Date
Cut count (non rewritable)
---
Total Power ON Time (min)
---
Total Print Time
---
Tube Replacement Date & Time
---
Continuous Power ON Time (Max.)
---
Tube Counter when Replacement
---
Print Time (Max.)
---
PF Motor Replacement Times
---
Power ON - OFF Times
---
Ratio of Print in Power ON OFF hours (Power ON hours)
---
---
PF Motor Replacement Date & Times
Power On - OFF Interval (broken down by Power OFF Time)
PF Motor Counter when Previous Replacement
---
---
PrintHead 1 (Full) Replacement Times
---
Power OFF Time (Max.)
---
NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer
301 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series Error History
Table 4-7. Utilization History Item
Parts Replacement Date
ADJUSTMENT
Revision A
Description
Cutter Unit Replacement Times
---
Cutter Unit Replacement Date & Times
---
Damper Kit Replacement Times
Table 4-8. Error History Item
Description
Number of Normal Errors
Displays the most recent six errors and their time stamps.
Number of Service Calls
Displays the most recent six service call errors and their time stamps.
---
Error History
Displays the number of occurrences of each service call error.
Damper Kit Replacement Date & Time
---
Number of Errors
Displays the number of occurrences of normal errors and service call errors.
Damper Kit Previous Counter when Replacement
---
Basic Information
Ink Holder Ink Flow Pump (Pressure pump motor) Drive Counter Reset
---
Table 4-9. Basic Information
Ink Holder Ink Flow Pump (Pressure pump motor) Drive Counter Replacement Date & Times
---
Pump Cap Unit Replacement Times
---
Pump Cap Unit Replacement Date & Times
---
Suction Pump Counter when Replacement
---
Main Board Replacement Times
---
Power Supply Unit Replacement Times
---
Item
Description
Model
Product name
Printer Serial No.
Serial number of the printer.
Printer Firmware Version
The version of the firmware installed on the printer.
Initial Ink Charge Date & Time
Date and time when the initial ink charge was done.
Setting Data
Displays the settings made by the control panel menus.
NV-RAM BACKUP/NVRAM Viewer
302 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.3 ADJUSTMENTS (Individual) This mode executes the adjustment required for the repair individually. PROCEDURE 1.
Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)] from the main menu.
2.
Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [OK].
3.
Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
4.
Click [Back] to return to the main menu.
Figure 4-7. ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)
ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)
303 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.4 ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence) This mode displays the required adjustments per replaced part and executes the adjustments in order. PROCEDURE 1.
Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)] from the main menu.
2.
Select the name of the replaced part and click [OK].
3.
Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [OK].
4.
Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
5.
Click [Back] to return to the adjustment item list per part after the adjustment.
6.
Click [Back] to return to the main menu. C H E C K P O IN T
The text of the executed adjustment is colored to be distinguished. The colored text gets back to normal by returning to the main menu once.
Figure 4-8. ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)
ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)
304 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.5 Installing Firmware This section explains how to update the firmware. The firmware of this printer is written in the Flash ROM on the MAIN BOARD. If the MAIN BOARD is replaced or the firmware needs to be updated, follow the procedure below to write the firmware to the Flash ROM. Following three kinds of firmware are provided.
Main firmware (Printer and Network integrated firmware)
PS Option firmware / resource
Reel Option firmware Figure 4-9. FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL
C A U T IO N
C H E C K P O IN T
When Initial ink charge is not needed when replacing the MAIN BOARD with a new one, make sure to turn “Initial Ink Charge Flag” to off (P. 310) before updating the firmware. (The printer is rebooted automatically right after uploading the firmware. Since the parameter does not exist on the new MAIN BOARD, the initial ink charge starts automatically.)
6.
Click [Browse] of the F/W Update list to select the firmware data to be installed.
7.
Click [Update] to transfer the firmware data.
C A U T IO N
To check the current firmware version, start the printer in the normal mode and click [Get Information].
When updating starts, a progress bar is displayed on the Control Panel of the printer. After updating is complete, the printer restarts automatically. Make sure not to turn off the printer until updating is complete. Otherwise, the printer may not operate normally afterward.
8.
When writing the firmware is completed, the printer will be turned OFF.
9.
Click [Exit].
10. Turn the printer on in the normal mode.
PROCEDURE 1.
Turn both the printer and computer OFF and connect them with a USB cable.
11. “NVRAM CLEAR OK” is displayed on the panel. (only when replacing the MAIN BOARD)
2.
Open the Front Cover.
12. Click [OK].
3.
Pull out all the ink cartridges.
13. A cover open error will occur.
4.
Turn the printer ON in the F/W update mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Load] + [Feed] + [Maintenance] buttons together.
14. Turn the printer OFF.
5.
Start the Service Program and select [FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL] from the main menu.
ADJUSTMENT
Installing Firmware
305 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.6 Image Print The following functions are provided. Prints an image file Transfers the PRN. file PROCEDURE 1.
Click [IMAGE PRINT] from the main menu.
2.
Click [References] and specify a file to print.
3.
Click [Print].
Figure 4-10. [IMAGE PRINT] Screen C A U T IO N
Make the file name of an image file or PRN. file in half size less than 80 characters.
1
ADJUSTMENT
Image Print
306 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.7 Counter Reset
Table 4-10. Clear Counter Menu List Class
Whenever the parts/units which have life counter are replaced, the corresponding life counter must be reset. This is important to replace those parts/units at the correct timing.
Main unit PF MOTOR counter (Motor) APG Motor
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode
Main unit counter (Ink system)
PROCEDURE
Item
Clear Menu Name PF Motor Counter APG motor counter reset
ATC MOTOR (1)
ATC Motor (1) Counter Reset
ATC MOTOR (2)
ATC Motor (2) Counter Reset
Cutter motor
Cutter motor counter reset
PRINT HEAD
Print Head Counter
DAMPER KIT
Damper Kit Counter
PUMP CAP UNIT
Pump Cap Unit Counter
1.
Turn the printer ON.
IC HOLDER
Ink Holder Counter
2.
Start the Service Program and click [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] from the main menu.
INK TUBE
Ink tube counter
3.
Choose one of the counter reset menus to be reset.
4.
Click [Run] to reset the counter.
5.
Click [Finish].
6.
Restart the printer.
7.
With NVRAM Viewer, verify that the counter has been reset to "0".
8.
Turn the printer OFF. C H E C K P O IN T
Main unit MAIN BOARD counter (Board) POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSH)
Main Board Exchange Counter Power Supply Unit Replacement Date & Time Setting
Change Flag Status
Initial Ink Charge Flag
Initial Ink Charge Flag
Administrator Password
Administrator Password
Administrator Password Reset
The history of the Counter Clear can be checked per counter on the NVRAM Viewer (P. 298).
Table 4-10. Clear Counter Menu List Class Main unit CR MOTOR counter (Motor)
ADJUSTMENT
Item
Clear Menu Name CR Motor Counter
Counter Reset
307 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Figure 4-11. [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] Screen
ADJUSTMENT
Counter Reset
308 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.8 References This function allows you to view the following information (PDF files). Control panel menus in the Normal mode Control panel menus in the Serviceman Mode Wiring diagrams PROCEDURE 1.
Click [References] from the main menu.
2.
Select Panel Menu Map or Wiring Diagrams and click [Open].
Figure 4-12. References
ADJUSTMENT
References
309 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.9 Initial Ink Charge Flag This function allows you to set whether or not to execute the Initial Charge when the printer is turned ON. To execute the Initial Charge, set the flag to ON. PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Start the Service Program and click [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] from the main menu.
3.
Select Initial Ink Charge Flag.
4.
Select ON or OFF and click [Run].
5.
Turn the printer OFF.
Figure 4-13. [Initial Ink Charge Flag] Screen
ADJUSTMENT
Initial Ink Charge Flag
310 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.10 CR Related Adjustments 4.10.1 CR Belt Tension Check REQUIRED TOOLS Sonic tensimeter U-507 Something to flip the belt STANDARD VALUE SC-T7000 Series/SC-T5000 Series 23 ± 2 N SC-T3000 Series 13 ± 2 N Figure 4-14. [CR Belt Tension Check] Screen
EXECUTION MODE
6.
Input the following values to the tensimeter.
Normal mode
MASS: WIDTH: SPAN:
PROCEDURE 1.
Remove the following part in advance.
RIGHT UPPER COVER (P. 128)
LEFT UPPER COVER (P. 135)
2.
Turn the printer ON.
3.
When any paper is loaded, remove it.
4.
Start the Service Program and select CR Belt Tension Check.
5.
Click [Run]. The CR UNIT moves left and right three times, and then moves to the adjustment position.
ADJUSTMENT
SC-T7000 Series/SC-T5000 Series
7.
1.0 g/m 8.0 mm/R 300 mm
SC-T3000 Series
MASS: 1.0 g/m WIDTH: 5.5 mm/R SPAN: 300 mm Bring the microphone of the tensimeter closer to the position shown in Figure 4-16. C H E C K P O IN T
CR Related Adjustments
Bring the microphone within 5 mm from the belt but do not let it touch the belt.
311 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 8.
Revision A
Press [MEASURE] on the tensimeter and flip the belt with tweezers or a similar tool. Measuring microphone
C A U T IO N
9.
Be sure to measure the tension of the belt on the upper side. If you measure the tension of the belt on the lower side, the measuring value may be inaccurate. Flip the belt as weak as the tensimeter can measure it. Be careful not to let the microphone touch the belt when flipping the belt.
Measure the belt tension for three times, and check if the average is within the standards.
Within the standards: Click [Yes].
Out of the standards: After performing the adjustment from Step 13, click [No]. And then go back to Step 7.
Upper timing belt
CR UNIT
Center (Measurement point)
Driven pulley
Figure 4-16. Measuring the belt tension
Figure 4-15. Adjustment message
10. Click [Finish]. 11. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
CR Related Adjustments
312 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
12. Click [No] on the program screen. Screws
Figure 4-17. Adjustment message
13. Loosen the two screws that secure the driven pulley holder. Driven pulley holder
14. Turn the adjustment screw to adjust the belt tension.
If larger than standard value: Turn the screw counterclockwise.
If smaller than standard value: Turn the screw clockwise.
Tension adjustment screw (black)
After adjusting the tension, tighten the screws loosened in Step 12, and then back to Step 7. C H E C K P O IN T
Figure 4-18. Tension adjustment screw
The tension is changed about 1.5N by turning the adjusting screw for a quarter turn.
ADJUSTMENT
CR Related Adjustments
313 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.10.2 APG Function Check
“--” is not on the top: Go to Step 6
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode
Mark on the top
PROCEDURE 1.
Remove the following part in advance.
--
RIGHT UPPER COVER (P. 128)
2.
Turn the printer ON.
3.
Start the Service Program and select APG function check.
4.
Click [Run]. The APG mechanism will move. APG cam
Figure 4-20. Checking the APG cam
6.
Since the APG is not switched correctly, execute the following remedy responding to the symptom. Symptom
Remedy
The CR UNIT does not move to the APG switch position (home position).
Since the CR UNIT may not move smoothly, lubricate the CR UNIT. (P. 369)
The CR UNIT moves to the APG switch position but the APG mechanism does not operate.
Since the APG Motor may not operate, check the wiring of the APG Motor. If there is no trouble for the wiring, replace the APG Motor (APG unit). (P. 181)
Since the APG mechanism on the CR UNIT may The APG mechanism operates but the APG not have been installed correctly, replace the CR is not switched correctly. UNIT. (P. 193) Figure 4-19. [APG function check] Screen
5.
After taking the above measure, return to Step 4 to check again.
Check that the mark on the top of the APG cam is "--". Run the check two times and check the mark.
7.
Click [Finish].
8.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
“--” is on the top: Go to Step 7
ADJUSTMENT
CR Related Adjustments
314 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.10.3 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Auto Adjustment PAPER USED Type:
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Size:
16 inches or longer
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment.
Figure 4-21. [Ink Mark Sensor check & Auto Adjustment] Screen
4.
Click [Run]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
5.
The printed pattern is scanned by the IM SENSOR and the adjustment is made automatically. If the adjustment failed, clean the IM SENSOR or replace it.
6.
Click [Finish].
7.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. DS: Dm: Dm’ : A/D: D/A:
0
5
Check1 = OK, Check2 = OK
Figure 4-22. Adjustment Pattern
ADJUSTMENT
CR Related Adjustments
315 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.10.4 CR Scale Check
4.
Since the CR SCALE is not scanned correctly, clean the scale using ethanol. If the scale still cannot be read properly, replace the CR ENCODER (P. 175) or the CR SCALE (P. 170). After replacing the part, return to Step 3 and check again.
5.
Click [Finish].
6.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select CR Scale Check.
3.
Click [Run]. The CR UNIT moves left and right five times, and then the CR ENCODER starts to read the scale.
The result is OK: Go to Step 5
The result is NG: Go to Step 4
CR ENCODER CR SCALE
Figure 4-24. CR Encoder and Scale Check
Figure 4-23. [CR Scale Check] Screen
ADJUSTMENT
CR Related Adjustments
316 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.10.5 CR Active Damper Auto Adjustment EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
When any paper is loaded, remove it.
2.
Turn the printer ON.
3.
Start the Service Program and select CR Active Damper Adjustment (Automatic).
4.
Click [Run] to execute the calibration of the CR active damper.
5.
If a completion message appears, press [OK].
6.
Click [Finish].
7.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Figure 4-25. [CR Active Damper Adjustment] Screen
CR Related Adjustments
317 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.10.6 Auto Uni-D Adjustment PAPER USED Type:
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Size:
SC-T7000 Series: 44 inches
SC-T5000 Series: 36 inches
SC-T3000 Series: 24 inches
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE
Figure 4-26. [Auto Uni-d adjustment] Screen
1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select Auto Uni-d adjustment.
4.
Click [Run]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
5.
After the pattern is printed, the printer will automatically scan the pattern and carry out the adjustment (no manual adjustment is needed).
6.
Click [Finish].
7.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Figure 4-27. Adjustment Pattern
CR Related Adjustments
318 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.10.7 Auto Bi-D Adjustment, acceleration/deceleration print correction PAPER USED Type:
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Size:
The maximum paper width which can be set
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select Auto Bi-D adjustment, acceleration and deceleration correction.
4.
Select All rows adjust or 5 rows adjust and click [Run]. The adjustment pattern will be printed. C H E C K P O IN T
All rows adjust "All rows adjustment" results high accuracy adjustment, but it takes a long time. 5 rows adjust Adjustment accuracy becomes slightly lower with "5 rows adjustment" since colors used for this adjustment are limited; however, the adjustment time can be shorten.
5.
After the pattern is printed, the printer will automatically scan the pattern and carry out the adjustment (no manual adjustment is needed).
6.
Click [Finish].
7.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Figure 4-28. [Auto Bi-D Adjustment] Screen
Figure 4-29. Adjustment Pattern (all rows)
Figure 4-30. Adjustment Pattern (5 rows)
CR Related Adjustments
319 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.10.8 PW + T&B&S check and adjustment
4.10.8.2 T&B&S Adjustment
4.10.8.1 PW Adjustment
PAPER USED Type: Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper
PAPER USED
Size: A4
Type: Archival Matte Paper/Enhanced Matte Paper Size: A4
STANDARD VALUE
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE
10 ± 0.4 mm
Bottom margin:
14 ± 0.6 mm
Side margin:
10 ± 0.4 mm
PROCEDURE
1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select PW + T&B&S check and adjustment.
4.
Click [PW Adjustment]. Check the displayed message.
When the adjustment is complete normally: Go to Step 6
Data written in NVRAM and acquired data have mismatch. Please try again.: Go to Step 4
Failed adjustment. Check printer condition.: Go to Step 5
5.
Since the PW sensor may not be attached properly, attach it again properly. (P. 198) After attachment, check it again performing Step 4. If the same error still occurs after the recheck, check if the sensor operates properly or not carrying out Sensor check (P. 359). If any error was found by carrying out Sensor check, replace the PW sensor.
6.
Click [Finish].
7.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Top margin:
1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select PW + T&B&S check and adjustment.
4.
Click [Print]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
5.
Measure the distance for the positions shown in Figure 4-31.
Within the standards: Go to Step 9
Out of the standards: Go to Step 4
C A U T IO N
CR Related Adjustments
Make sure to place the adjustment pattern on a flat place to measure the distances.
320 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 6.
Revision A
Remove paper from the paper cassette, and carry out Step 5 feeding paper from the rear by hand.
Within the standards: Go to Step 9
Out of the standards: Go to Step 7
7.
Input the value which was measured in Step 5 and is out of the standards.
8.
Click [Write] and return to Step 4.
9.
Click [Finish].
10. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. Bottom margin (14 ± 0.6 mm)
Paper feed direction
Side margin Full side (10 ± 0.4 mm)
Side margin Home side (10 ± 0.4 mm)
Top margin (10 ± 0.4mm)
Figure 4-31. Adjustment Pattern
ADJUSTMENT
CR Related Adjustments
321 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.10.9 PG Check & Adjustment Mark on the top
REQUIRED TOOLS Thickness Gauge
++
STANDARD VALUE 2.5 go 2.8 no-go EXECUTION MODE Normal mode
Figure 4-32. APG cam position checking point
PROCEDURE 1. When any paper is loaded, remove it. 2.
Turn OFF the printer.
3.
Remove the following parts in advance.
RIGHT UPPER COVER (P. 128)
4.
Unlock the CR UNIT MANUALLY. (P. 117)
5.
Check that the mark on the top of the APG cam is "++".
ADJUSTMENT
CR Related Adjustments
322 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
6.
SC-T3000 Series
Place the thickness gauge on the specified position as follows, and check PG at the both left and right of the PRINT HEAD. If the result is NG, adjust PG carrying out Step 7 and the following steps.
C A U T IO N
When moving the CR UNIT, make sure to do it by pulling the CR TIMING BELT.
SC-T7000 Series
When measuring the left side of the Head
When measuring the right side of the Head
Figure 4-35. The measurement position for SC-T3000 Series
When measuring the left side of the Head
When measuring the right side of the Head
Figure 4-33. The measurement position for SC-T7000 Series
SC-T5000 Series
When measuring the left side of the Head
When measuring the right side of the Head
Figure 4-34. The measurement position for SC-T5000 Series
ADJUSTMENT
CR Related Adjustments
323 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
7.
Move the CR UNIT to the left end.
8.
Remove the CR COVER. (P. 155)
9.
Remove the following two plate.
PG adjustment lever
Plates
PG adjustment screw
Figure 4-36. Removing the plate
10. Loosen the PG adjustment screws that secure the PG adjustment levers. 11. Move the PG adjustment levers up and down to change the gap (PG).
If “2.8 no-go” is NG: Lower the lever
If “2.5 go” is NG: Raise the lever
Figure 4-37. PG Adjustment Levers and PG Adjustment Screws
12. Adjust all the measurement points to become within the standard. 13. Measure all the points again after adjustment to confirm all of them are within the standard. 14. Attach the removed parts. 15. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
CR Related Adjustments
324 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.11 Head Related Checks and Adjustments 4.11.1 Tube Inner Pressure Reduction EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Tube inner pressure reduction.
3.
Click [Run]. The pressure inside the ink flow paths will be reduced.
Figure 4-38. [Tube inner pressure reduction] Screen
4.
Click [Finish].
5.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
325 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.11.2 Head ID Input EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Write down the Head Rank ID (31 digits) that is printed on the ID label on the PRINT HEAD (on a new PRINT HEAD when replaced with a new one.). C H E C K P O IN T
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
QR code
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure 4-39. [Head ID Input] Screen
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
2.
Assemble the printer.
3.
Turn the printer ON.
4.
Start the Service Program and select Head ID Input.
5.
Enter the 31-digit ID into the edit boxes in the same way as indicated on the label. (Enter the digits continuously without pressing the Space, Enter, or Tab key.)
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
326 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 6.
Click [Write].
7.
Click [Finish].
8.
Turn the printer OFF.
C A U T IO N
Revision A
After clicking [Finish], make sure to turn the printer off. Turning the printer on again enables the head rank ID setting.
Input
ID label
Figure 4-40. Head rank ID
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
327 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.11.3 Nozzle Check PAPER USED Type:
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Size:
16 inches
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Nozzle Check.
3.
Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print or Alignment Check Pattern Print.
4.
Click [Run]. The nozzle check pattern or alignment check pattern is printed.
5.
Examine the patterns for any missing segments, broken lines, or misaligned lines.
6.
If any of the above symptoms is observed, run the cleaning and print the pattern again to see if the problem is solved.
Figure 4-41. [Nozzle Check] Screen
Figure 4-42. Nozzle check pattern
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
328 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.11.4 Cleaning EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE C H E C K P O IN T
Please perform 1 time CL3 and repeatedly CL1 until all nozzles are discharged if PRINT HEAD is replaced.
1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Cleaning.
3.
Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [Run]. Cleaning is executed.
4.
Click [Finish].
5.
Turn the printer OFF.
ADJUSTMENT
Figure 4-43. [Cleaning] Screen
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
329 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.11.5 Head Inclination Check & Adjustment (CR direction) The following two methods are provided. Automatic adjustment: An adjustment pattern is printed and scanned by the IM SENSOR, and required adjustment level is displayed. Manual adjustment: Visually check the printed adjustment pattern, and determine the required adjustment level. The way to actually correct the head inclination according to the result obtained by any of the above methods is the same. PAPER USED Type:
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Size:
24 inches or longer Figure 4-44. [Head Inclination check & adjustment (CR direction)] Screen
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode
4.11.5.1 Head Inclination Auto Adjustment (CR direction) 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select Head inclination check & adjustment (CR direction).
4.
Select [Automatic], and click [Next].
5.
Click [Run]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
6.
The printed pattern is scanned by the IM SENSOR and the required adjustment level (how much the adjustment knob should be turned) is displayed when the adjustment is required.
7.
Make the adjustment referring to 4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR direction) (Page 331).
Figure 4-45. Auto adjustment pattern
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
330 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.11.5.2 Head Inclination Manual Adjustment (CR direction)
4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR direction)
1.
Turn the printer ON.
1.
Press the F11 key of the keyboard to unlock the CR UNIT.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
2.
Move the CR UNIT to the left end of the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select Head inclination check & adjustment (CR direction).
3.
Remove the CR COVER. (P. 155)
4.
Loosen the three screws (A, B, C) that secure the DAMPER KIT.
5.
Loosen the three screws (D, E, F) that secure the head holder.
6.
Loosen the screw (G) (Bit No. 1) that secures the adjustment knob.
4.
Select [Manual], and click [Next].
5.
Click [Run]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
6.
Examine the printed pattern visually.
7.
Make the adjustment referring to 4.11.5.3 Correcting Head Inclination (CR direction) (Page 331).
C A U T IO N
7.
OK
Be careful not to completely remove the screw that secures the adjustment knob.
Turn the adjustment knob to correct the head inclination. See Figure 4-47 for which direction to move the knob.
Paper feed direction
NG
NG
Adjustment knob Misalignment within one-dot's width is OK. Plus direction
Figure 4-46. Judgement
Minus direction
DAMPER KIT
Figure 4-47. Correcting the Head Inclination
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
331 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 8.
Tighten the three screws to secure the head holder. Tighten them in the order shown below. D - E - F
9.
Tighten the screw to secure the adjustment knob.
Revision A
C H E C K P O IN T
10. Tighten the three screws to secure the DAMPER KIT. (there is no particular order to tighten them.)
See below, direction of rotation of the adjustment cam
Paper feed direction
11. Attach the CR COVER. 12. Print the pattern and see if the inclination is corrected. If not, repeat the procedure until the pattern becomes normal.
13. When finished, click [Finish] and turn the printer OFF.
When the Cyan line is under the Magenta line, turn clockwise
When the Cyan line is under the Magenta line, turn counterclockwise
Since the resolution is different depending on the presence or absence of the distinction mark, it is necessary to change the amount of rotation of the adjustment cam. If there is distinction mark, turn twice the adjustment cam compared to normal.
magnification
distinction mark
1.
If there is no distinction mark When adjustment cam turn 5 to 6 notch, about one dot line will be moved. 5 to 6 notch
Plus direction
Minus direction
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
332 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
C H E C K P O IN T
2.
If there is distinction mark When adjustment cam turn 10 to 12 notch, about one dot line will be moved. 10 to 12 notches
Plus direction
Revision A
4.11.6 Head Slant Check & Adjustment (PF direction) The following two methods are provided. Automatic adjustment: An adjustment pattern is printed and scanned by the IM SENSOR, and required adjustment level is displayed. Manual adjustment: Visually check the printed adjustment pattern, and determine the required adjustment level. The way to actually correct the head inclination according to the result obtained by any of the above methods is the same.
Minus direction
PAPER USED Type:
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Size:
The maximum paper width which can be set
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
333 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.11.6.1 Head Slant Auto Adjustment (PF direction) 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select Head Slant Check & Adjustment (PF direction).
Figure 4-49. Auto adjustment pattern
Figure 4-48. [Head Slant check & adjustment (PF direction)] screen
4.
Select [Automatic], and click [Next].
5.
Click [Run]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
6.
The printed pattern is scanned by the IM SENSOR and the required adjustment level (how much the adjustment knob should be moved) is displayed.
7.
Make the adjustment referring to 4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF direction) (Page 336).
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
334 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.11.6.2 Head Slant Manual Adjustment (PF direction) 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select Head Slant Check & Adjustment (PF direction).
4.
Select [Manual], and click [Next].
5.
Click [Run]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
6.
Examine the printed pattern visually. See if the gaps between the squares are parallel. If so, no adjustment is required. If not, make the adjustment referring to 4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF direction) (Page 336).
A
B A
C
B A
B
OK
A=B C=D
OK
D C
Paper feed direction B A
A=B C=D
D C
It does not matter if the gap widths (the width of A-B and that of C-D) differ.
A≠B C≠D
NG
A≠B C≠D
NG
D C
D
Figure 4-50. Judgement
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
335 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.11.6.3 Correcting Head Slant (PF direction)
6.
Tighten the screw to secure the adjustment knob.
1.
Press the F11 key of the keyboard to unlock the CR UNIT.
7.
2.
Move the CR UNIT to the left end of the printer.
Print the pattern and see if the slant is corrected. If not, repeat the procedure until normal pattern is printed.
3.
Remove the CR COVER. (P. 155)
8.
When finished, click [Finish] and turn the printer OFF.
4.
Loosen the screw (Bit No. 1) that secures the adjustment knob.
C A U T IO N
5.
Rear
Be careful not to completely remove the screw that secures the adjustment knob.
Rear
Print He
Front
ead
Print H
ad
Condition of the head
Paper feed direction
Move the adjustment knob to correct the head slant. See Figure 4-51 for which direction to move the knob.
Adjustment knob
Front
Printed pattern
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Screw
Adjustment knob Minus direction
Print Head
Print Head
Plus direction
Figure 4-52. Adjustment
Figure 4-51. Correcting the Head Slant
ADJUSTMENT
Head Related Checks and Adjustments
336 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.12 Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments 4.12.1 Ink eject & pressure reduction EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode PROCEDURE C H E C K P O IN T
Time required for ejecting ink (all rows): about 15 minutes
1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Start the Service Program and select Ink eject & pressure reduction.
3.
Select the rows for discharge (All rows / Single row).
4.
Remove the ink cartridge of the rows for discharge.
5.
Click [Run].
6.
When finished, turn the printer OFF.
C A U T IO N
Figure 4-53. [Ink eject & pressure reduction] Screen
Running the Ink eject function one time may not be enough to prevent ink from leaking when removing the ink tubes. Prepare paper or cloth to wipe off spilled ink in advance or run the Ink eject function twice in a row.
ADJUSTMENT
Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments
337 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.12.2 Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning) THINGS TO PREPARE When cleaning all rows:
4 maintenance boxes
5 cleaning cartridges
When cleaning single row (C/M or Y/Pk)
2 maintenance boxes
2 cleaning cartridges
When cleaning single row (Mk)
1 maintenance box
1 cleaning cartridge Figure 4-54. [Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning)] Screen
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Cleaning.
3.
Select All rows or Single row and click [Run].
4.
Clean the tubes following the on-screen instructions.
5.
Click [Finish].
6.
Turn the printer OFF. C H E C K P O IN T
This menu ends after filling cleaning fluid. Before the next ink charge, discharge the cleaning fluid by performing 4.12.1 Ink eject & pressure reduction (Page 337).
ADJUSTMENT
Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments
338 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.12.3 Initial Ink Charge EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Start the Service Program and select Initial ink charge.
3.
Insert the ink cartridges into all the ink holders.
4.
Select All rows or Single row and click [Run].
5.
Click [Finish].
6.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. Figure 4-55. [Initial ink charge] Screen
ADJUSTMENT
Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments
339 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.13 Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments 4.13.1 PF Belt Tension Check REQUIRED TOOLS
Fixing screws
Sonic tensimeter U-507 Any tools to flip the timing belt STANDARD VALUE 10 ± 3.5 N EXECUTION MODE PF motor mounting plate
Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Figure 4-56. Softening the PF TIMING BELT
Remove the following parts in advance.
LEFT UPPER COVER (P. 135)
LEFT LOWER COVER (P. 132)
2.
Loosen the two screws that secure the PF motor mounting plate.
3.
Move the mounting plate back and forth three times to soften the PF TIMING BELT.
4.
Tighten the two screws to secure the mounting plate.
ADJUSTMENT
Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
340 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 5.
Turn the printer ON.
6.
Start the Service Program and select PF Belt Tension check.
7.
Click [Run]. The PF roller rotates 30 revolutions.
Revision A 10. Click [MEASURE] on the tensimeter, and flip the timing belt with tweezers or a similar tool. C A U T IO N
Flip the timing belt as weak as the tensimeter can measure it. Be careful not to let the microphone touch the timing belt when flipping the belt.
11. Measure the belt tension three times, and check if the average is within the standards.
Within the standards: Go to Step 12
Out of the standards: Go to Step 2
Measuring microphone
Figure 4-57. [PF Belt Tension check] Screen
8.
9.
Input the following information on the belt into the tensimeter.
MASS:
1.3 g/m
WIDTH:
6.0 mm/R
SPAN:
78 mm
Bring the microphone of the tensimeter close to the belt as shown in Figure 4-56. C H E C K P O IN T
The distance between the microphone and the belt surface should be 5 mm or less, but do not let it touch the belt.
Figure 4-58. PF Belt Tension Check
12. Click [Finish]. 13. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
341 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
4.13.2 PC Scale Check
Revision A 5.
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode
The result is OK: Go to Step 7
The result is NG: Go to Step 6
6.
Since the PF SCALE may be dirty, clean it with ethanol. After cleaning the PF SCALE, perform Step 4 to run the check again. If the result is still NG, replace the PF ENCODER (P. 203) or the PF SCALE (P. 202) and check again.
Remove the following part in advance.
7.
Click [Finish].
LEFT UPPER COVER (P. 135)
8.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
LEFT LOWER COVER (P. 132)
PROCEDURE 1.
After the PF SCALE has rotated 30 revolutions, the check result is displayed.
Point to be checked
2.
Turn the printer ON.
3.
Start the Service Program and select PF Scale Check.
4.
Click [Run] to rotate the PF SCALE. Look at the PF ENCODER and the PF SCALE from straight above, and visually check that the scale is not in contact with the encoder.
Figure 4-60. PC Scale Check
Figure 4-59. [PF Scale Check] Screen
ADJUSTMENT
Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
342 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.13.3 Media Feed Auto Adjustment PAPER USED Type:
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
Size:
16 inches or longer
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE C H E C K P O IN T
Required time: about 4 minutes
Figure 4-61. [Media Feed Auto Adjustment] Screen
1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Load the paper into the printer.
3.
Start the Service Program and select Media Feed Auto Adjustment.
4.
Click [Run]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
5.
After the pattern is printed, the printer will automatically scan the pattern and carry out the adjustment (no manual adjustment is needed).
6.
Click [Finish].
7.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. Figure 4-62. Adjustment Pattern
ADJUSTMENT
Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
343 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
4.13.4 Cut Position Check & Adjustment
Revision A 5.
REQUIRED TOOLS
< Inaccurate cutting check > Check if the average of the maximum value and the minimum value is within the standards.
Calibrated Loupe
Within the standards: Go to Step 6
Out of the standards: Replace the cutter (refer to User's Guide) since the precision of the cutter is not appropriate. Replace the CUTTER UNIT if not improved. And then, perform Step 3 again.
PAPER USED Type:
PGPP250
6.
SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series: 44 inches
< Cut position check and adjustment > Check if the average of the maximum value and the minimum value is within the standards.
SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series: 36 inches
Within the standards: Go to Step 9
SC-T3200 series: 24 inches
Out of the standards: Go to Step 7
Size:
7.
Input the maximum value and the minimum value from the values measured in Step 6.
Inaccurate cutting check: 15 ± 0.3 mm
8.
After performing Step 3 and Step 4, go back to Step 6.
Cut Position Check & Adjustment: 15 ± 0.3 mm
9.
Click [Finish].
STANDARD VALUE
10. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Cut position check and adjustment.
3.
Click [Print]. The adjustment pattern will be printed.
4.
Measure the distances of three points, Home, Center, and Full shown in Figure 4-64.
ADJUSTMENT
Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
344 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Figure 4-63. [Cut position check and adjustment] Screen
Full
Center
Home
Paper feed direction
Figure 4-64. Adjustment Pattern
ADJUSTMENT
Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
345 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.13.5 Paper Thickness Sensor Adjustment
6.
Check that the control panel displays “00”. When the displayed value is other than “00”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
REQUIRED TOOLS
7.
Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
P-THICK sensor adjustment jig(0.2*/0.5/0.6)
8.
Insert the adjustment jig of 0.5 from the paper insertion opening and set the jig at the position shown in Figure 4-65, then press [Paper Set].
9.
Check that the control panel displays “00”. When the displayed value is other than “00”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
Paper thickness sensor adjustment jig(0.8) Note "*": Use the P-THICK sensor adjustment jig (0.2) when measuring the paper thickness of 1.0 by stacking it with the Paper thickness sensor adjustment jig 0.8.
10. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode
11. Set the adjustment jig of 0.6 at the position shown in Figure 4-65, then press [Paper Set].
STANDARD VALUE
12. Check that the control panel displays “10”. When the displayed value is other than “10”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE. 13. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
Table 4-11. Standard Value Paper presser status
Jig type
Panel display
Locked
N/A
00
Locked
0.5
00
Locked
0.6
10
Locked
0.8
10
Locked
1.0
11
Released
N/A
01
CHECKING PROCEDURE 1.
14. Set the adjustment jig of 0.8 at the position shown in Figure 4-65, then press [Paper Set]. 15. Check that the control panel displays “10”. When the displayed value is other than “10”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE. 16. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser. 17. Insert the adjustment jig of 1.0 (Stack 0.2 jig on 0.8 jig) from the paper insertion opening and set the jig at the position shown inFigure 4-65, then press [Paper Set].
Remove the following part in advance.
18. Check that the control panel displays “11”. When the displayed value is other than “11”, carry out the adjustment. → ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
19. Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
TOP COVER (P. 118)
2.
Attach the control panel (P. 153) with the upper rear cover removed.
3.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
4.
Select Mecha Adjustment → Paper.
5.
Press [Paper Set], and lock the paper presser.
ADJUSTMENT
Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
346 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
20. With the paper presser being released, check that the control panel displays “01”. When the displayed value is other than “01”, carry out the adjustment. → Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
C H E C K P O IN T
Slide the paper thickness sensor holder forward to raise the value and backward it to decrease the value.
21. After checking and adjusting, check again all the condition is correct. 3.
Secure the screws to fix the paper thickness sensor holder.
Paper thickness sensor holder 2
Adjustment jig
Paper thickness sensor holder 1
Align the right end with the 1st row of the pressure roller
Align this end with the stepped end of the platen. Screws Setting direction
Figure 4-65. Setting position of the adjustment jig
Figure 4-66. Adjusting the Positions
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE When the least significant digit of the value differ from the standard value, adjust the paper thickness sensor holder 2 (left side) position, and when the second digit from the least significant digit of the value differ from the standard value, adjust the paper thickness sensor holder (right side) position. 1.
Loosen the screws (one each) that secure the paper thickness sensor holder.
2.
Slide the paper thickness sensor holder forward and backward checking the panel display, and hold the position of the paper thickness sensor holder at the immediate after the position that the panel display is switched.
ADJUSTMENT
Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
347 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
4.13.6 Rear AD Adjustment
Revision A
C A U T IO N
REQUIRED TOOLS
When the following procedure is conducted, make sure not to remove the exterior parts to acquire correct AD values.
Standard Sheet (JETRAS JP-D300S) 7.
EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode STANDARD VALUE 83 to 129
C A U T IO N
PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Select Mecha Adjustment → Rear AD. C H E C K P O IN T
Select Mecha Adjustment → Rear AD and press [OK] when [Enter] Start is displayed. Check that the triple-digit displayed on the control panel is within the standard. When Retry AD Adjust is displayed, check that the standard sheet has no abnormality (such as, breaks dirt, and wrinkles), and acquire the AD values again. When the Retry AD Adjust is displayed again, the PE SENSOR is broken. Replace the PE SENSOR with a new one and carry out the adjustment again.
8.
Press [Back] several times to return to the top menu.
9.
Press [Paper Set], and release the paper presser.
10. Remove the standard sheet and turn the printer OFF.
The following procedure must be done without the standard sheet.
Standard sheet
3.
Press [OK] while [Enter] Start is displayed. Confirm that the control panel displays Retry AD Adjust.
4.
Press [Back] several times to return to the top menu.
5.
Select Rear AD again, and press [Paper Set] to release the paper presser when [Enter] Start is displayed.
6.
Set the standard sheet and press [Paper Set].
C A U T IO N
Align the right end with the 1st row of the pressure roller
Align this end with the stepped end of the platen.
Setting direction
Set the standard sheet with its matte surface up.
Figure 4-67. Setting Position of the Standard Sheet
ADJUSTMENT
Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments
348 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.14 Boards Related Checks and Adjustments 4.14.1 Main Board initial setting EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Start the Service Program and select Main Board initial setting.
3.
Click [Run].
4.
The main board will be initialized.
5.
Click [OK].
6.
Printer will automatically shut down.
C A U T IO N
Figure 4-68. [Main Board initial setting] Screen
If the initialization fails, run this function again. If still fails, replace main board to a brand-new main board.
ADJUSTMENT
Boards Related Checks and Adjustments
349 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.14.2 RTC Check & Adjustment EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Start the Service Program and select RTC Check &Adjustment.
3.
Check the Date and Time displayed, and correct them if necessary.
4.
Click [Write] to write RTC to the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD.
5.
Click [Finish].
6.
Turn the printer OFF. Figure 4-69. [RTC Check & Adjustment] Screen
ADJUSTMENT
Boards Related Checks and Adjustments
350 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
4.14.3 MAC Address Input
Revision A
C A U T IO N
EXECUTION MODE
Click [Read] once. After waiting two and half minutes until the network firmware is restarted, follow the procedure below.
Serviceman Mode (Partially in the Normal Mode) PROCEDURE 1.
Start the printer in the Normal Mode and reset the IP Address from the operation panel on the printer.
2.
Turn the printer OFF.
3.
Connect the printer to the computer with a USB cable.
4.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
5.
Start the Service Program and select MAC Address Input.
MAC address label
Figure 4-71. MAC Address Label
Figure 4-70. [MAC Address Input] Screen
6.
Enter the MAC address indicated on the MAC address label attached on the rear of the printer, and click [Write].
ADJUSTMENT
7.
Click [Read] once. The written MAC address is displayed in about two minutes.
8.
Check that the address you entered and that displayed on the screen are the same.
9.
Click [Finish].
10. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
Boards Related Checks and Adjustments
351 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.14.4 Serial Number & USB ID Check & Adjustment EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Start the Service Program and select Serial Number & USB ID Check & Adjustment.
3.
Enter a 10-digit serial number of the printer, and click [Write]. The serial number is written to the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD. Based on the entered serial number, the USB ID is generated automatically and recorded on the NVRAM.
4.
When you click [Read], the serial number written on the NVRAM is automatically read and displayed on the screen.
5.
Click [Finish].
6.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
C A U T IO N
Figure 4-72. [Serial Number & USB ID Check & Adjustment] Screen
If the printer is turned OFF and back ON after changing the USB ID, the computer (Windows) detects the USB port as a new port and automatically copies the printer driver as xxxx (copy x). If you need to perform another adjustment using this tool, select the "copy x" driver.
ADJUSTMENT
Boards Related Checks and Adjustments
352 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.14.5 Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information Write to NVRAM EXECUTION MODE Serviceman Mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Start the Service Program and select Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information Write to NVRAM.
3.
Click [Run]. The serial number of the Option HDD Unit or Option PS Unit is written to the NVRAM on the MAIN BOARD.
4.
Click [Finish].
5.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Figure 4-73. [Option HDD/PS Unit S/N information Write to NVRAM] Screen
Boards Related Checks and Adjustments
353 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.14.6 Board Replacement Date & Time Setting EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Main Board Exchange Counter (or Power Supply Unit Replacement Date & Time setting).
3.
Click [Run]. When a confirmation message is displayed, press [OK].
4.
Click [Finish].
5.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment. Figure 4-74. [Main Board Exchange Counter] Screen
ADJUSTMENT
Boards Related Checks and Adjustments
354 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.15 Other Printer Checks and Adjustments 4.15.1 Suction Fan Adjustment EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Suction Fan Adjustment.
3.
Click [Run]. When the suction fan operates, check its operation sound and also check if the fan sucks paper placed on the platen.
4.
Click [Finish].
5.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Figure 4-75. [Suction Fan Adjustment] Screen
Other Printer Checks and Adjustments
355 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.15.2 Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset.
3.
When initializing the panel setting, run [Initialize all setting] from the control panel menu.
4.
When resetting the user job history, click [Run].
5.
Click [Finish].
6.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Figure 4-76. [Panel Setting Reset & Job History Reset] Screen
Other Printer Checks and Adjustments
356 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
4.15.3 Roll Unit Nip Release C A U T IO N
Revision A 4.
Click [Finish].
5.
Turn the printer OFF to Complete the work.
The roller position goes back to the nipping position when turning the printer back on. Therefore, make sure to perform this item at the end of the preparation before long term storage.
EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Roll Unit Nip Release.
3.
Press the [Run] button to release the 1st Roll and 2nd Roll. Make sure the Release Roller and Paper Feed Roller are in contact with each other at the paper inlet for the 1st Roll. Figure 4-78. [Roll Unit Nip Release] Screen Release Roller
Paper Feed Roller
Figure 4-77. Roll Unit Nip Release
ADJUSTMENT
Other Printer Checks and Adjustments
357 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.15.4 Operation Panel Check (LCD & Buttons)
4.15.4.2 Panel Buttons Operation Check
4.15.4.1 Panel LCD Operation Check
EXECUTION MODE
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
PROCEDURE
1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
1.
Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu] + [Back] + [OK].
2.
Select Mecha Adjustment → Panel Check.
2.
Select Mecha Adjustment → LCD RGB Check.
3.
Press buttons you want to check the functions, and check if the button names you pressed match the names displayed on the panel.
3.
Select one of the three colors at a time and press [Menu]. The LCD is filled with solid red, green or blue color. Check if there is no missing dots. Check the colors in the order of red, green, and then blue.
4.
To select the next color, press [Pause/Reset] or [Back].
Paper Feed Pause Maintenance
Paper Settings
LCD RGB Check Red Green Blue
UP Menu Right Back HEATER
Figure 4-79. Color LCD Display Check Exits from the menu
Down
OK
Figure 4-80. Buttons and Their Names Displayed on the Panel
ADJUSTMENT
Other Printer Checks and Adjustments
358 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
4.15.5 Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment The measurement adjustment can be made for the following motors individually. CR MOTOR Pump motor (PUMP CAP UNIT) PF MOTOR Cutter motor EXECUTION MODE Normal mode PROCEDURE 1.
Turn the printer ON.
2.
Start the Service Program and select Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment of the target motor.
3.
Click [Run]. Measurement and adjustment are performed automatically.
4.
When finished, click [Finish].
C A U T IO N
5.
Figure 4-81. [Motor Measurement & Automatic Adjustment] Screen
The adjustment may fail if you touch the printer during measurement. In such a case, perform the adjustment again. If the re-adjustment is not complete correctly, replace the motor.
Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT
Other Printer Checks and Adjustments
359 Confidential
CHAPTER
5
MAINTENANCE
Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
5.1 Overview
C A U T IO N
This chapter provides information on how to maintain the printer in its optimum operating condition. Basically, servicing on the printer should be performed on-site. Be sure to strictly observe the following precautions when servicing to avoid an accident or injury causing the user trouble. W A R N IN G
The power switch is installed on the secondary side of the power circuit, so power is always supplied to the power supply circuit even when the switch is OFF unless the power cord is unplugged from the wall power outlet. Unless otherwise stated (for printing or operation checks), be sure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before disassembling or assembling the printer to prevent electric shock and damage to the circuit. The Front Sensor provided for detecting open/close status of the Printer Cover also acts as a safety interlock switch. Never disable the switch function to prevent possible injury. A lithium battery is mounted on the Main Board (control circuit) for memory backup. Be sure to observe the following precautions when handling the Main Board. • Be careful not to short the electrode of the battery. • When replacing the battery, make sure to insert it in correct orientation. • Never heat the battery or plunge it into the flames. • Do not put the Main Board directly on conductive materials. Be extremely careful not to get the ink into your eye or let it come into contact with your skin. If it happens, wash out your eye or skin with water immediately. If any abnormality is found, contact a physician.
MAINTENANCE
Overview
Ensure sufficient work space for servicing. Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface. When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such products containing flammable gas is prohibited. Be sure to spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the work space before removing any ink-path-related parts or components to keep the space from being soiled with leaked ink. Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such as anti-static wrist straps. When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed, take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in moving parts such as the fan unit. When the printer needs to be repacked for transportation after being used, make sure to follow the steps below after turning the power OFF. • Check that the Printhead is capped properly. • Leave the ink cartridges installed in the printer. • Repack the printer using the packaging box, cushioning materials and protective equipment indicated in the unpacking guide.
361 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
5.2 Storing the Printer When storing the printer, make sure to leave the ink cartridges installed and place it on a horizontal surface, and also inform the user on the following cautions. When not using the printer for a long time
Turn on the printer at least once a week to let it clean the nozzles and prevent clogging of the nozzles.
Remove the media. If the media is left set for a long time, nip impression of the Press Roller may remain on the media, or the media may ripple.
Check that the Printhead is capped properly.
Close all the covers.
When storing the printer for a long time, evacuate the ink and flush the ink passage. (See “4.12.2 Cleaning (Tube Inner Cleaning)” (p338).)
Before using the printer again Make sure to print a nozzle check pattern and check for clogging of the printhead. If any clogging can be seen, carry out a head cleaning. C H E C K P O IN T
After performing the head cleaning a few times, try turning off the printer and leaving it overnight or longer, so that the ink may dissolve and the clogging might be improved.
MAINTENANCE
Storing the Printer
362 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
5.3 Transportation C A U T IO N
Do not lift or carry the printer with one person because it is very heavy. When the printer needs to be moved, make sure to lift or carry the SC-T3200 series with two people or more, and the SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series with four people or more. When lifting the printer, work in a posture that does not damage your body. To prevent the printhead from drying or ink leakage, keep the ink cartridges installed. To keep the printer intact, do not touch any parts other than those you have to touch.
Lift the printer by holding the positions shown below.
Figure 5-2. Transportation (SC-T3200 series)
Figure 5-1. Transportation (SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series/SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series)
MAINTENANCE
Transportation
363 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
5.4 Exchange Parts Exchange parts of this printer are as follows. Note *1:
M/C = Maintenance call S/C = Service call
*2:
See Chapter 2 “Troubleshooting” for details of maintenance call and service call.
*3:
Reciprocating 400CPS operations, required passes for A1+/20,000 sheets: 720 x 1400 dpi (Plain Paper, CAD / Line Drawing, Fine, Continuity) x safety rate (x 2)
*4:
Outward 400CPS/return 500CPS operation, required passes for A0+/20,000 sheets: 720 x 1400 dpi (Plain Paper, CAD / Line Drawing, Fine, Continuity) x safety rate (x 2)
*5:
Outward 400CPS/return 500CPS operation, required passes for B0+/20,000 sheets: 720 x 1400 dpi (Plain Paper, CAD / Line Drawing, Fine, Continuity) x safety rate (x 2)
Table 5-1. Exchange Parts Parts
Life SC-T3200 series
SC-T5200/SC-T5200D series
Print Head
The number of fired ink droplets: 684,000,000,000,000
Damper Kit
Buffer counter: 280,000 times
Ink Tube
The number of paths: approx. 2,900,000*3
IC Holder
SC-T7200/SC-T7200D series
Exchange Timing (call) *1*2 M/C: None S/C: None M/C (Near end of life): 00000400 S/C: 14C0
The number of paths: approx. 4,100,000*4
The number of paths: approx. 5,000,000*5
M/C (Near end of life): 00000001 S/C: 1101
The number of ink cartridge replacements: 2,700 times
M/C (Near end of life): 00000080, 00001000
Pump counter: 280,000 times
S/C: 14B0, 1430
CR MOTOR Driven Pulley CR UNIT
The number of paths: approx. 2,900,000*3
The number of paths: approx. 4,100,000*4
The number of paths: approx. 5,000,000*5
M/C: None S/C: None
CR FFC
Pump Cap Unit
Life counter: 1,150,000
RTC Battery
5 years or more
MAINTENANCE
M/C (Near end of life): 00000004 S/C: 1412 M/C: 00000008 S/C: None
Exchange Parts
364 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
5.5 Cleaning
CLEANING THE PLATEN 1. Open the Printer Cover.
CLEANING THE ROLLER 1. Turn the printer on and load a roll paper with the specified maximum width. 2.
2.
Press the [Feed/Cut Media] button, then press the [Down] button. C H E C K P O IN T
The roll paper will be fed while the [Down] button is pressed. If no smear is attached on the roll paper, it is the end of cleaning, so stop cleaning the roller.
Wipe of the dust or dirt in the direction of the arrow using a soft cloth such as a waste cloth. If the dirt persists, damp a soft cloth in water with a little neutral detergent and wring it out tightly, then wipe the dirt off with it, then dry the platen with a dry soft cloth.
C A U T IO N
Do not touch the ink pads.
Ink pad
Platen
Figure 5-3. Cleaning the Platen
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning
365 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 3.
Revision A
Using a pointed tool such as a tooth pick, push in the foreign things such as paper dust stuck in the holes on the Platen.
CLEANING THE INSIDE OF THE PLATEN/REPLACING THE INK PAD After massive borderless printing is performed, waste ink may flow out on the platen. In such a case, clean the inside of the platen and replace the ink pad. Platen Ink pad
Figure 5-5. Contaminated platen and ink pad
Figure 5-4. Cleaning the Suction Holes on the Platen
MAINTENANCE
1.
Remove the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
2.
Remove the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127)
3.
Remove the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
4.
Remove the TOP COVER. (p118)
Cleaning
366 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 5.
Remove the 12 screws (three each), and remove the four sub platen.
Revision A 6.
A) Silver M3x8 Cup S-tite screw: 12 pcs
Platen
Sub platen A
A
A
Sub platen
Platen
Figure 5-6. Cleaning the inside of the platen (1)
MAINTENANCE
Remove the five platens in the direction of the arrow. (Remove the platen on the full side first.)
Figure 5-7. Cleaning the inside of the platen (2)
Cleaning
367 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series 7.
Revision A
Clean the platen base full of waste ink with waste cloths or the like.
9.
Make sure to insert the legs of the ink pad into the holes on the platen base, then install the five platens (install the one on the home side first.)
Platen base Paten
Leg of the ink pad
Hole
Platen base
Figure 5-10. Replacing the ink pad (2)
Figure 5-8. Cleaning the inside of the platen (3)
8.
Remove the contaminated ink pad from the platen and replace it with a new one.
10. Install the four sub platen. (refer to Figure 5-6) 11. Install the TOP COVER. (p118) 12. Install the PANEL BOARD. (p153)
Ink pad
13. Install the UPPER SUPPORT R COVER. (p127) 14. Install the UPPER LEFT COVER. (p134)
Platen
Figure 5-9. Replacing the ink pad (1)
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning
368 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
5.6 Lubrication
[Lubrication 1]
LUBRICATION This section describes necessary lubrication to maintain the functions and performance of this printer. Make sure to properly lubricate the parts/units specified in this section as necessary when replacing or maintaining them. C A U T IO N
Make sure to perform the lubrication following the specified lubrication points, lubricants, and amount. Otherwise, the printer may not operate normally. When lubricating the originally installed parts, first wipe off the old lubricant completely.
Part Name
CR main shaft
Lubricants (Part Code)
G-84 (1516265)
Amount
φ 2 mm x 8 mm x 8 points
Lubrication Tool
φ 2 mm injector
Lubrication Manner
Lubricate on both ends of the CR main shaft and between the posts, then spread the lubricant entirely with a waste cloth or the like.
Note
Be careful not to apply the lubricant beyond the specified point.
Lubrication Point
LUBRICATION POINTS LIST Lubrication No.
Corresponding Part
Name of Lubricant
Lubrication Tool
Reference
1
CR main shaft
Part name: G-84 Part code: 1516265
p.369
2
CR sub shaft
Part name: G-84 Part code: 1516265
p.370
3
OIL PAD HOLDER (RIGHT/LEFT)
Part name: G-84 Part code: 1516265
p.370
Part name: O-17 Part code: 1521154
4
CR slider
Part name: G-84 Part code: 1516265
5
MR Release Assy Guide
Part name: G-26 Part code: 1080614
MAINTENANCE
φ 2 mm injector
CR main shaft
p.371 Brush
p.371
Lubrication
369 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
[Lubrication 2]
[Lubrication 3]
Part Name
CR sub shaft
Lubricants (Part Code) G-84 (1516265) Amount
φ 2 mm x 4 mm x 8 points
Lubrication Tool
φ 2 mm injector
Lubrication Manner
Lubricate on the back of the CR sub shaft at the posts and spread the lubricant entirely with a waste cloth or the like.
Note
Be careful not to apply the lubricant beyond the specified point.
Part Name
Oil pad holder (Left/Right)
Lubricants (Part Code)
1. G-81 (1574337) 2. O-17 (1521154)
Amount
1. 0.2 g to 0.25 g 2. 0.2 cc
Lubrication Tool
φ 2 mm injector
Lubrication Manner
Remove the oil pad holder. 1. Apply the lubricant with a syringe. 2. Let the oil soak into the oil pad.
Note
Be careful not to apply the lubricant beyond the specified point.
Cross section Oil pad holder
CR sub shaft Front
Post Oil pad
Lubrication Point 2
Lubrication Point 1
Lubrication Point
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication
370 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
[Lubrication 4] Part Name
[Lubrication 5] CR slider
Part Name
Lubricants (Part Code) G-84 (1516265)
MR Release Assy Guide
Lubricants (Part Code) G-26 (1080614)
Amount
φ 2 mm x 7 mm
Amount
φ 2mm x 15mm
Lubrication Tool
φ 2 mm injector
Lubrication Tool
Brush
Lubrication Manner
On the contact point of the CR slider with the sub shaft, lubricate by filling the lubricant into the groove.
Lubrication Manner
Lubricate on the contact point with the Paper Feed Release Roller Cam and spread the grease with a brush.
Note
Be careful not to apply lubricant beyond the specified point.
Note
Be careful not to apply lubricant beyond the specified point.
CR slider
MR Release Assy Guide
Lubrication Point Lubrication Point
MAINTENANCE
Lubrication
371 Confidential
CHAPTER
6
APPENDIX
Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
6.1 Block Wiring Diagram 6.1.1 Main Body 㪠㪤㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪧㪘㪥㪜㪣㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫
㪧㪮㩷 㪚㪩㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪜㪥㪚㪦㪛㪜㪩
㪧㪞㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷
㪧㪥㪣㪶㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪧㪜㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩䋨㪫㪟㪠㪚㪢㪥㪜㪪㪪㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩䋩
㪚㪥㪋 㪊 㪣㪜㪝㪫㩷㪩㪦㪣㪣㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㩷 㪦㪧㪜㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪉㫅㪻㩷㪘㪫㪚㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩 㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪝㪜㪜㪛㩷 㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩 㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷 㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪈
㪍
㪚㪥㪉
㪍
㪚㪥㪊
㪊
㪌
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪈
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪊
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪉
㪪㪬㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪊 㪚㪥㪈㪇㪋 㪋㪇
㪩㪜㪘㪩㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪈㪈 㪊 㪚㪥㪉 㪚㪥㪊 㪧㪘㪥㪜㪣㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪧㪩㪠㪥㪫㩷㪟㪜㪘㪛
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪇
㪚㪥㪈
㪈㫊㫋㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷㪘 㪈㫊㫋㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷㪙
㪚㪥㪋 㪉
㪉㪈
㪧㪜㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩䋨㪩㪦㪣㪣㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩䋩
㪚㪥㪌㪈 㪚㪥㪈 㪧㪪㪟㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪘㪚㪶㪠㪥
㪚㪩㩷㪟㪧㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪊
㪩㪠㪞㪟㪫㩷㪩㪦㪣㪣㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㩷 㪦㪧㪜㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷㪙
㪉
㪋
㪣㪚㪛
㪍
㪚㪥㪋
㪉
㪚㪥㪌
㪪㪬㪙㪄㪚㩷 㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛 㪊 㪚㪥㪍
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪝㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩㩷㪘 㪉㫅㪻㩷㪩㪦㪣㪣㩷㪣㪦㪚㪢㩷 㪛㪜㪫㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷 㪛㪜㪫㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪊
㪚㪥㪎
㪊
㪚㪥㪏
㪊
㪚㪥㪐
㪊
㪘㪫㪚㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪉
㪋㪇
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪈
㪋㪇
㪚㪥㪈㪊 㪉㪈 㪚㪥㪈㪇㪇 㪋㪇
㪈㫊㫋㩷㪧㪧㪢㩷㪩㪜㪣㪜㪘㪪㪜㩷 㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪈㪈 㩷
㪈㪉
㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪫㪟㪠㪚㪢㪥㪜㪪㪪㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪈㪍
㪈㪍
㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪫㪟㪠㪚㪢㪥㪜㪪㪪㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪇
㪍
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪈
㪤㪘㪠㪥㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪚㪥㪈㪐 㪊
㪚㪥㪈㪌
㪚㪥㪉㪌 㪚㪥㪉㪇 㪊 㪉 㪉 㪚㪥㪉㪋
㪉㪋
㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷㪟㪦㪤㪜㩷㪧㪦㪪㪠㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪧㪬㪤㪧㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩 㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪊 㪚㪥㪉㪊 㪚㪥㪉㪉 㪊 㪘㪻㫆㪹㪼㩷㪧㫆㫊㫋㪪㪺㫉㫀㫇㫋㩷㪊㩷 㪜㫏㫇㪸㫅㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋 㪟㪛㪛㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋
㪊㪋
㪚㪥㪈㪎
㪚㪥㪈㪋 㪊㪋 㪊㪇
㪈㫊㫋㩷㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷 㪝㪜㪜㪛㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪌㪇㪇
㪚㪥㪋㪇㪇
㪈㪌
㪘㪧㪞㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪉㪈
㪍 㪚㪥㪈 㪈㪍
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪠㪆㪝 㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅
㪚㪥㪐㩷 㩿㪜㫋㪿㪼㫉㫅㪼㫋㪀 㪚㪥㪍㩷㩿㪬㪪㪙㩷㪙㪀
㪊㪍
㪚㪥㪎㩷㩿㪬㪪㪙㩷㪘㪀
㪊 㪚㪥㪉㪐 㩷
㪚㪥㪌㪇㪇
㪊㪍
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪣㪜㪭㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪊㪋
㪚㪥㪍㪇㪇 㪚㪥㪍㪇㪈
㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪩㩷㪮㪘㪪㪫㪜㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷㪧㪬㪤㪧㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪚㪪㪠㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪘㪚㪫㩷㪤㪦㪛㪬㪣㪜
㪟㪛㪛㩷 㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛㩷 㪪㪬㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪝㪘㪥 㪧㪮㩷㪝㪘㪥 㪝㪘㪥 㪙㪦㪯㩷㪝㪘㪥
㪚㪥㪈㪇 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜 㪙㪦㪯
㪚㪩㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪊㪇
㪚㪪㪠㪚
㪠㪥㪢㩷㪚㪘㪩㪫㪩㪠㪛㪞㪜
㪐
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪈 㪚㪥㪏 㪉
㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜㩷㪧㪦㪪㪠㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪪㪬㪙㪄㪙㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛 㪚㪥㪍 㪊
㪚㪥㪌 㪍
㪚㪥㪋 㪍
㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷 㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷 㪤㪘㪠㪥㪫㪜㪥㪘㪥㪚㪜 㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪙㪦㪯 㪧㪩㪜㪪㪪㪬㪩㪜㩷 㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷 㪣㩷㪮㪘㪪㪫㪜㩷㪠㪥㪢㩷 㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷 㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩 㪚㪦㪭㪜㪩㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩 㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪚㪥㪉 㪋
㪍 㪚㪥㪊㪇㪇 㪚㪥㪈 㪉
㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪣㪦㪚㪢㩷㪪㪮㪠㪫㪚㪟
㪧㪝㩷 㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩 㪧㪝㩷 㪜㪥㪚㪦㪛㪜㪩
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
APPENDIX
Block Wiring Diagram
373 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
6.1.2 Auto Take-up Reel
㪚㫆㫅㫋㫉㫆㫃㩷㪧㪸㫅㪼㫃
LED
CN2
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪪㫌㫇㫇㫃㫐㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻 CN1
CN17
CN23
CN1 Auto Take-up Encoder CN11 CN22
㪤㪸㫀㫅㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻
Auto Take-up Motor
CN28
CN29
Slack Sensor
APPENDIX
Block Wiring Diagram
374 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
6.2 Connection Diagram
（1）
（2）
（2）
（3）
（4）
（5）
（1）
（3） Cable No.
Connection
1
INTERLOCK SWITCH
MAIN BOARD (CN20)
2
L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
SUB-B BOARD (CN8)
3
R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
Relay cable (MAIN BOARD (CN14))
APPENDIX
Cable No.
Connection
1
HEAD FFC
2
CR FFC
MAIN BOARD (CN100)
3
CR HP SENSOR
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN16)
4
APG MOTOR
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN15)
5
CR MOTOR
MAIN BOARD (CN19)
Connection Diagram
MAIN BOARD (CN101/CN102)
375 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
（1） （2） （3）
（1） （7）
（4）
（6） （2）
（5）
（3）
Cable No.
Connection
Cable No.
（4）
Connection
1
PW SENSOR
SUB BOARD (CN103)
1
BOARD BOX FAN
2
IM SENSOR
SUB BOARD (CN101)
2
HDD FAN
MAIN BOARD (CN25)
3
PG SENSOR
SUB BOARD (CN104)
3
PSH BOARD
MAIN BOARD (CN1)
4
CR ENCODER
SUB BOARD (CN102)
4
SUB-C BOARD
MAIN BOARD (CN500)
5
PW FAN
MAIN BOARD (CN29)
6
SUB-B BOARD
MAIN BOARD (CN300)
7
SUB-B BOARD
MAIN BOARD (CN301)
APPENDIX
Connection Diagram
MAIN BOARD (CN24)
376 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Cable No.
（2）
（1）
（6）
Connection
1
CSIC CONTACT MODULE (IC HOLDER)
MAIN BOARD (CN400)
2
PRESSURE MOTOR (IC HOLDER)
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN14)
3
INK LEVEL SENSOR (IC HOLDER)
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN14)
4
PRESSURE PUMP SENSOR (IC HOLDER)
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN14)
5
MAINTENANCE POSITION SENSOR (PUMP CAP UNIT)
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN14)
6
PUMP MOTOR (PUMP CAP UNIT)
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN14)
（5） （4） （3）
APPENDIX
Connection Diagram
377 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
（2） （3） （1） （4）
（5）
（6）
Cable No.
Connection
1
PF MOTOR
2
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
SUB-B BOARD (CN5)
3
PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR
SUB-B BOARD (CN6)
4
PF ENCODER
SUB-B BOARD (CN2)
5
CUTTER MOTOR
SUB-B BOARD (CN4)
6
L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN23)
APPENDIX
SUB-B BOARD (CN1)
Connection Diagram
378 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Cable No.
（1） （2） （3）
Connection
1
PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER)
Relay cable (MAIN BOARD (CN17))
2
PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR
Relay cable (MAIN BOARD (CN16))
3
PE SENSOR (THICKNESS PAPER) MAIN BOARD (CN21)
4
ATC MOTOR
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN15)
5
1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN15)
6
1st PAPER FEED MOTOR
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN15)
7
1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B
Relay cable (MAIN BOARD (CN17))
8
REAR COVER SENSOR
Relay cable (MAIN BOARD (CN17))
9
CUTTER SENSOR
Relay cable (MAIN BOARD (CN16))
10
SUCTION FAN (RIGHT)
Relay cable MAIN BOARD (CN22)
（4） （5） （6）
（7）
（8） （9）
（10）
APPENDIX
Connection Diagram
379 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Cable No.
（1）
（2）
（10）
Connection
1
2nd ATC MOTOR
SUB-C BOARD (CN2)
2
2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR
SUB-C BOARD (CN9)
3
2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A
SUB-C BOARD (CN8)
4
2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR B
SUB-C BOARD (CN6)
5
2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR
SUB-C BOARD (CN4)
6
RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR
SUB-C BOARD (CN5)
7
2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR
SUB-C BOARD (CN3)
8
2nd PF SENSOR
SUB-C BOARD (CN7)
9
2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR
SUB-C BOARD (CN11)
10
LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR
SUB-C BOARD (CN1)
（9） （8） （7） （6） （5） （3） （4）
APPENDIX
Connection Diagram
380 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
6.3 Panel Menu Map
APPENDIX
Panel Menu Map
381 Confidential
User Menu Map : Default setting
Print Queues
Print Queue
Job Detail
Print Queue*3
Waiting Job Name
Waiting Job Name
Hold Queue*2*3
User：
Savd Job Queue *3
Hold Queue
Estimated Start Time：
Print Job Log Sheet
View Hold Queue
Estimated Print Time：
Resume All J obs
Printing Availability：
Saved Job Queue
View Hold Queue
Job Detail
Stored Job Name
Paused Job Name
Paused Job Name
Paper
Load/Remove Paper
Job Detail
Paper Type:
Load/Remove Paper
Remove Paper
Stored Job Name
Source:
Select Paper Type
Roll Paper *2
User:
Size:
Custom Paper Setting
Roll 1*1
Length:
Reason For Hold:
Print Paper List
Roll 2 *1
Pages:
Roll Paper Remaining
Cut Sheet (up to 0.8 mm thick)
Remaining Alert
Poster Board
User:
Paper Type: Copies: Source:
Select Paper Type
Size:
Plain Paper
Estimated Print Time:
Photo Paper Matte Paper
Paper Feed Adjust
Others
Pattern
Custom Paper
Value
Custom Paper Setting
Select Reference Paper
Select Reference Paper
Plain Paper
Platen Gap
Photo Paper
Detect Paper Thickness
Matte Paper
Roll Paper Tension
Paper Feed Adjust
Others
Normal
Paper Suction
No Paper Selected
Roll Paper Tension Remove Skew
Platen Gap
Setting Name
Narrow
Restore Settings
Standard Wide
Roll Paper Remaining
Remove Skew ON OFF
Yes
Remaining Alert
Print Queues
1～15m
Paper
Large Copy / Large Scan
Extra High
No
TOP MENU
Enlarged Copy
High
Restore Settings
OFF
Setup
-4 to 0
Wider
ON
Maintenance
Paper Suction
Maintenance
Head Alignment
Cutter Maintenance
Adjust Cut Position
Nozzle Check
Auto (Uni-D)
Adjust Cut Position
-3 to 3m
Head Cleaning
Auto (Bi-D)
Replace Cutter
Head Alignment
Manual (Uni-D)
Cutter Maintenance
Manual (Bi-D)
Setup
Printer Setup
Roll Paper Setup
Auto Cut
Printer Setup
Roll Paper Setup
Auto Cut
ON
Option Setup *4
Advanced Settings
Cutting Mode
OFF
Printer Status
HP-GL/2 Settings
Refresh Margin
Network Setup
Restore Settings
Page Line
Cutting Mode
Power Settings
Roll Paper Margin
Normal
Preference
Roll End Option
Silent
Administrator Menu
Auto Loading*1 Roll Switch Setting *1
Refresh Margin
Roll Switch Condition*1
ON OFF
Advanced Settings Roll Paper Tension Less Head Scuffing Drying Time Per Page
Page Line ON OFF
Paper Size Check Paper Skew Check
Roll Paper Margin
Store Held Job*2 *3
Normal
USB Timeout
Top15mm/Bottom15mm Top35mm/Bottom15mm
HP-GL/2 Settings
Top45mm/Bottom15mm
Quality
3 mm
Output Size
15 mm
Margin Margin Options
Roll End Option
Rotate
Continue
Mirror
Stop Printing
Select Palette
Reprint *3
Define Palette Line Merge Reset HP-GL/2 Settings
Restore Settings Yes No
Auto Loading ON OFF
Roll Switch Setting Auto Roll 1 Roll 2
Quality Speed
Roll Switch Condition
Fine
Paper Type
Output Size Auto A Series
Paper Length Paper Width Print Job Priority *3
US-ANSI US-ARCH B Series
Roll Paper Tension 1 to 5
Photo Series Others User Defined
Less Head Scuffing ON OFF
Margin 3mm 5mm
Margin Options Standard Add Margins
Drying Time Per Page Off to 60 minutes
Paper Size Check ON OFF
Clip By Margins
Paper Skew Check Rotate 0° 90° 180° 270°
ON OFF
Store Held Job ON OFF
Mirror ON OFF
USB Timeout 10 to 600 seconds
Select Palette Software Default Palette A Palette B
Define Palette Palette A Palette B
Line Merge ON
*1：SC-T7200D Series/SC-T5200D series only *2：SC-T7200 Series/SC-T5200 Series/SC-T3200 series only *3：When the optional hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only *4：When the optional Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only
OFF
Reset HP-GL/2 Settings Yes No
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
No.1
User Menu Map : Default setting
Setup
Option Setup
Printer Setup
PS3 Expansion Unit
Option Setup *4 Printer Status Network Setup Power Settings Preference Administrator Menu
Printer Status Firmware Version Option Status Show Total Prints Print Status Sheet
PS3 Expansion Unit
PostScript version
PS Status Sheet
PDF version
Output Size Quality Color Mode Dot Correction CMYK Simulation RGB Source Rendering Intent Black Pt Compensation Auto Rotate Caching To HDD PS Error Sheet
Network Setup
IP Address Setting
IP Address Setting
Auto
IPv6 Setting
Panel
IPsec Setting PSK Setting
IPv6 Setting
IEEE802.1x Setting
Enable
HTTPS Redirect Setting Print Status Sheet Restore Settings
Version
Version
Disable
Output Size Auto A Series US-ANSI US-ARCH B Series Photo Series Others User Defined
Quality Speed Normal Fine
Color Mode Color
IPsec Setting
Grayscale
Enable Disable
Dot Correction ON
IEEE802.1x Setting
OFF
Enable Disable
CMYK Simulation SWOP v2
HTTPS Redirect Setting
US Web Uncoated v2
Enable
US Sheetfed Coated v2
Disable
US Sheetfed Uncoated v2 Coated GRACoL 2006
Restore Settings
SWOP Grade 3 Paper
Yes
SWOP Grade 5 Paper
No
Coated FOGRA27 Web Coated FOGRA28
TOP MENU
Power Settings
Sleep Mode
Uncoated FOGRA29
Sleep Mode
5 to 210 minutes
Coated FOGRA39
Print Queues
Power Off Timer
Paper
Restore Settings
Euroscale Coated v2
Power Off Timer
Euroscale Uncoated v2
Maintenance
OFF
Setup
1 to 24 hours
JapanWebCoated (Ad) JapanColor2001Coated
Enlarged Copy
Restore Settings
Large Copy / Large Scan
Yes No
JapanColor2001Uncoated JapanColor2002Newspaper JapanColor2003WebCoate EPSON_TOYO EPSON_DIC OFF
Preference
Language
Language
RGB Source sRGB
Unit: Length
Adobe RGB (1998)
Alert Lamp Setting
Apple RGB ColorMatch RGB OFF
Rendering Intent Absolute Relative Perceptual Saturation
Unit: Length m
Black Pt Compensation
ft/in
ON OFF
Alert Lamp Setting ON
Auto Rotate
OFF
ON OFF
Administrator Menu
Operational Control
Change Password
Network Setup
Caching To HDD ON
Operational Control Power Cleaning
Manage HDD
Manage HDD*3
Format Hard Disk
OFF
PS Error Sheet
Printer Mode Date And Time
Printer Mode
ON
Time Zone
Auto
OFF
Reset PS Settings*4
PostScript*4
Reset All Settings
HP-GL2
Network Setup Password Required
Date And Time
No Password Required
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
Reset PS Settings Yes No
Format Hard Disk Yes No
Reset All Settings Yes No
Enlarged Copy
Color/Grayscale
Color/Grayscale
Color
Auto
Grayscale
Quality Density
Auto
Auto
A3->Auto
With Border
B4->Auto
Borderless
A4->Auto B5->Auto
Document Size
A5->Auto
A3
LTR->Auto
B4
4x6->Auto
A4
A4/2->Banner (Auto)
B5 A5 LTR
Other Size Document Size Output Size Border
Quality Speed Fine
Density
4x6
Output Size A0 USE B1 A1 US D B2 US C A2 A0 (2Sheets)
Five options from Light to Dark
Border Borderless
*1：SC-T7200D Series/SC-T5200D series only *2：SC-T7200 Series/SC-T5200 Series/SC-T3200 series only *3：When the optional hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only *4：When the optional Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
No.2
User Menu Map : Default setting
Enlarged Copy
Color/Grayscale
Color/Grayscale
Color
Auto
Grayscale
Quality Density
Auto
Auto
A3->Auto
With Border
B4->Auto
Borderless
A4->Auto B5->Auto
Document Size
A5->Auto
A3
LTR->Auto
B4
4x6->Auto
A4
A4/2->Banner (Auto)
B5 A5 LTR
Other Size
4x6
Document Size Output Size Border
Quality Speed Fine
Output Size A0 US E B1 A1 US D B2 US C
Density
A2
Five options from Light to Dark
A0 (2Sheets)
Border With Border Borderless
Large Copy / Large Scan
Copy Settings
Roll Select
Copy Settings
Roll Select
Roll 1
Scan Setting *1
Scaling
Roll 2
Color/Grayscale
TOP MENU Print Queues Paper Maintenance Setup
Document Type
Scaling
Manual
Width
Manual
25 to 400%
Quality
Auto
Density Contrast
Color/Grayscale
Background Sharpness
Color Grayscale
Enlarged Copy
Document Type
Large Copy / Large Scan
Text/Line Drawing Tracing Paper Recycled Paper Blueprint Poster
Width
cm
Auto
20 to 90 cm
ISO A, US-ANSI, US-ARCH, JIS B, ISO B
inch
cm
8 to 36 in
inch
Quality Speed Fine
Density Level -3 to 3
Contrast Level -3 to 3
Background Level -3 to 3
Sharpness Level -3 to 3
Scan Setting
Color/Grayscale
Color/Grayscale
Color
Document Type
Grayscale
Width Save Image Type
Document Type
Resolution
Text/Line Drawing
File Size Compression
Tracing Paper
Density ステータスの確認 Contrast
Recycled Paper
Background
Poster
Blueprint
Sharpness
Width
cm
Auto
20 to 90 cm
ISO A, US-ANSI, US-ARCH, JIS B, ISO B
inch
cm
8 to 36 in
inch
Save Image Type JPEG PDF
Resolution Direct Print (360dpi) 200 dpi 300 dpi 400 dpi 600 dpi
File Size Compression High Normal Low
Density Level -3 to 3
Contrast Level -3 to 3
Background Level -3 to 3
Sharpness Level -3 to 3
*1：SC-T7200D Series/SC-T5200D series only *2：SC-T7200 Series/SC-T5200 Series/SC-T3200 series only *3：When the optional hard disk unit or Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only *4：When the optional Adobe PostScript 3 Expansion Unit has been connected only
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
No.3
Serviceman Mode Menu Map : Default setting
Mecha Adjustment
RearAD
Paper
[Enter] Start
RearAD CR Un Cap LCD RGB Check SELF TESTING
SELF TESTING Mecha Adjustment Life
Panel Check Sensor Check PPK Sensor Check WPPK Sensor Check WRoll Pull Out Check
CR Un Cap [Enter] Un Cap
LCD RGB Check Red Green Blue
Panel Check Displays button name
Sensor Check ILS PPK Sensor Check [Enter] Start WPPK Sensor Check [Enter] Start WPPK Pull Out Check Full Home Life
CR
PG
CR PF RLS
PG H to F Speed F to H Speed Page Size Fan
PG-PG-
APG Cutter Roll LD
PGtyp PG+ PG++
Life Count
Roll RLS
H to F Speed
WRoll LD
400 CPS 500 CPS
WRoll RLS PP change
240 CPS
Display Count
F to H Speed 400 CPS 500 CPS 240 CPS Page Size 0 - 1314 mm Fan 0
- 200 %
Life Count 0 - 99999999 PF
Feed Amount 1
Feed Amount 1 Feed Speed 1 Feed Amount 2 Feed Speed 2 Wait
-1000.0 - 1000.0 (0.1 )
Fan Life Count
Feed Speed 1 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 Feed Amount 2 -1000.0 - 1000.0 (0.1 )
Feed Speed 2
RLS Wait 1 Wait 2 Life Count
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4
Wait 0.0
- 999.9 sec
Fan 0
- 200 %
Life Count 0 - 99999999 APG
PG
PG Wait Life Count
PGtyp PG+ PG++
Cutter Length Return Length
Wait 0.0 - 999.9 sec
Wait
Life Count
Life Count
0 - 99999999
Roll LD
Feed Speed
Feed Amount Feed Speed Wait Life Count
KS2 KS3 Life Count 0 - 99999999
Roll RLS
Direction
Direction Wait 1 Wait 2 Life Count
CW CCW Life Count 0 - 99999999
WRoll LD
Feed Speed
Feed Amount Feed Speed Wait Life Count
WKS2 WKS3 Life Count 0 - 99999999
WRoll RLS
Direction
Direction Wait 1 Wait 2 Life Count
CW CCW Life Count 0 - 99999999
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
6.4 Part names used in this manual
Table 6-1. Conversion Table Part name used in this manual
To make it easier to locate the target part from its part name, this manual uses the part names different from the ASP part names. The table below shows the conversion of the part names used in this manual and the corresponding ASP part names.
RIGHT UPPER COVER & RIGHT ROLL COVER
Table 6-1. Conversion Table Part name used in this manual TOP COVER
3.4.2.1
3.4.2.2
LOWER PAPER GUIDE
PAPER GUIDE LOWER ASSY.,ESL,ASP
LOWER PAPER GUIDE B
COVER,SIDE,RIGHT,UPPE R CAP,CR,ADJUST COVER,SIDE,ROLL,RIGHT
Ref. (Ch3 sec.No.)
3.4.2.9
RIGHT LOWER COVER COVER,SIDE,RIGHT,LOWER
3.4.2.10
RIGHT BASE COVER
COVER,BASE,RIGHT
3.4.2.11
LEFT LOWER COVER
COVER,SIDE,LEFT,LOWER
3.4.2.12
REAR RIGHT LOWER COVER
CAP,COVER,REAR
3.4.2.13
UPPER LEFT COVER
COVER,TOP,LEFT
3.4.2.14
LEFT UPPER COVER & COVER,SIDE,LEFT,UPPER LEFT ROLL COVER COVER,SIDE,ROLL,LEFT
3.4.2.15
LEFT BASE COVER
COVER,BASE,LEFT
3.4.2.16
FRONT LEFT LOWER COVER
COVER,FRONT,LEFT,LOWE R
3.4.2.17
REAR LEFT LOWER COVER
CAP,COVER,REAR
3.4.2.18
REAR ROLL COVER FRAME
N/A
3.4.2.19
3.4.2.3
SENSOR ASSY.;C
3.4.2.20
PAPER GUIDE LOWER,B,ASSY.,ESL,ASP
CARTRIDGE COVER SENSOR
3.4.2.4
SENSOR ASSY.
3.4.2.21
IH COVER
HOLDER,IH,ASSY,ASP COVER,IH,ASSY,ASP
R WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
3.4.2.5
SENSOR ASSY.;B
3.4.2.22
WASTE INK TANK COVER
L WASTE INK COVER SENSOR
COVER,TANK,INK EJECT
3.4.2.6
INTERLOCK SWITCH
INTER KOCK,ASSY.,ESL,ASP
3.4.2.23
MAIN BOARD
BOARD ASSY.,MAIN
3.4.3.1
SUB BOARD
BOARD ASSY.,SUB
3.4.3.2
SUB-B BOARD
BOARD ASSY.,SUB
3.4.3.3
PSH BOARD
BOARD ASSY.,POWER SUPPLY
3.4.3.4
PANEL BOARD
PANEL,ASSY.,ESL,ASP HOUSING,PANEL,LOWER, ASSY,ASP
3.4.3.5
PRINTER COVER
UPPER SUPPORT R COVER
APPENDIX
COVER,TOP,BASE,44 COVER,TOP,RIGHT
Ref. (Ch3 sec.No.)
COVER,FRONT,ASSY,ASP COVER,FRONT,SUB,LEFT, 44 COVER,FRONT,SUB,RIGHT ,44 COVER,INNER COVER,INNER,LEFT,44,AS SY,ASP COVER,INNER,RIGHT,44,A SSY,ASP COVER,FRONT,RIGHT COVER,FRONT,LEFT
FRONT COVER
Housing
ASP part name
ASP part name
COVER,PRINTER,SUB,LEF T,44 COVER,PRINTER,SUB,RIG HT,44 COVER,PRINTER
3.4.2.7
COVER,TOP,SUPPORT,RIGH T
3.4.2.8
Housing
Electric Circuit Components
Part names used in this manual
386 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 6-1. Conversion Table Part name used in this manual
Carriage Mechanism/ Ink System Mechanism
APPENDIX
ASP part name
Table 6-1. Conversion Table Ref. (Ch3 sec.No.)
Part name used in this manual
ASP part name
Ref. (Ch3 sec.No.)
CR COVER
COVER,CR
3.4.4.1
PF MOTOR
MOTOR ASSY.,PF
3.4.5.1
DAMPER KIT
DUCT ASSY.,CR,ASP
3.4.4.2
PF SCALE
SCALE,PF,UNIT,ESL,ASP
3.4.5.2
PRINT HEAD
PRINT HEAD,IC856V
3.4.4.3
PF ENCODER
BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,PF
3.4.5.3
HEAD FFC
HARNESS
3.4.4.4
PF TIMING BELT
TIMING BELT,PF
3.4.5.4
CR FFC
HARNESS
3.4.4.5
PRESSURE ROLLER
N/A
3.4.5.5
CR SCALE
SCALE,CR,44;ASP
3.4.4.6
MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB
3.4.5.6
CR ENCODER
BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER
3.4.4.7
PRESSURE ROLLER MOTOR
CR TIMMING BELT
TIMING BELT,CR,44
3.4.4.8
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
3.4.5.7
CR MOTOR
MOTOR ASSY.,CR
3.4.4.9
PRESSURE ROLLER SENSOR
CR HP SENSOR
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
3.4.4.10
ATC MOTOR
MOTOR ASSY.,REWIND
3.4.5.8
PE SENSOR (ROLL PAPER)
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
3.4.5.9
APG UNIT
MOTOR,APG,ASSY.,ESL,A SP MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB
3.4.4.11
PE SENSOR (THICK PAPER)
BOARD ASSY.,DETECTOR,PW;B
3.4.5.10
PG SENSOR
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
3.4.4.12
PUMP CAP UNIT
PUMP CAP ASSY,ASP
3.4.4.13
PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
3.4.5.11
IC HOLDER
HOLDER ASSY.,IC,ASP
3.4.4.14
3.4.5.12
TUBE,CR,44,ASSY.,ESL,ASP
3.4.4.15
PF ROLLER MIDDLE SUPPORT
N/A
INK TUBE CR UNIT
CR,44,ASSY.,ESL,ASP
3.4.4.16
REAR COVER
Paper Feed Mechanism
N/A
3.4.5.13 3.4.5.14
IM SENSOR
BOARD ASSY.,INK MARK
3.4.4.17
PW SENSOR
BOARD ASSY.,DETECTOR,PW;B
PAPER GUIDE SENSOR ASSY REAR COVER SENSOR MR.,ESL,ASP
3.4.4.18
1st PPK ROLLER ASSY
N/A
3.4.5.15
1st PAPER GUIDE
N/A
3.4.5.16
1st PAPER FEED MOTOR
N/A
3.4.5.17
1st PPK RELEASE MOTOR
N/A
3.4.5.18
1st PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B
N/A
3.4.5.19
REAR BOARD PAPER GUIDE
N/A
3.4.5.20
UPPER 2nd PAPER GUIDE
N/A
3.4.5.21
LOWER 2nd PAPER GUIDE
N/A
3.4.5.22
Part names used in this manual
387 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
Table 6-1. Conversion Table Part name used in this manual Cutter Mechanism
Fan
Auto Take-up Reel
2nd Roll Unit
ASP part name
Ref. (Ch3 sec.No.)
Part name used in this manual
ASP part name
Ref. (Ch3 sec.No.)
2nd PAPER FEED MOTOR
MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB
3.4.9.11
2nd PPK RELEASE MOTOR
MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB
3.4.9.12
2nd ATC MOTOR
MOTOR ASSY.,REWIND
3.4.9.13
2nd PF SENSOR
2ND,PPK,SENSOR,ASSY MR.,ESL,ASP
3.4.9.14
3.4.8.1
2nd PPK RELEASE SENSOR A/B
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
3.4.9.15
DETECTOR,WINDER
3.4.8.2
2nd PAPER DETECTION SENSOR
N/A
3.4.9.16
TAKE-UP REEL LED
INDICATOR,WINDER
3.4.8.3
2nd ATC GEAR ASSY
N/A
3.4.9.17
TAKE-UP REEL SWITCH
2nd ATC SHAFT ASSY
N/A
3.4.9.18
SW,WINDER
3.4.8.4
TAKE-UP REEL PS BOARD
BOARD ASSY.,POWER SUPPLY
3.4.8.5
TAKE-UP REEL MOTOR
MOTOR ASSY.,REWIND
3.4.8.6
TAKE-UP REEL MAIN BOARD
BOARD ASSY.,MAIN
3.4.8.7
FRONT FRAME
N/A
3.4.9.1
REAR FRAME
N/A
3.4.9.2
LEFT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR
LEAF SENSOR
3.4.9.3
RIGHT ROLL UNIT OPEN SENSOR
LEAF SENSOR
3.4.9.4
2nd ROLL LOCK DETECTION SENSOR
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
3.4.9.5
CUTTER UNIT
CUTTER,44,ASSY.,ESL,ASP
3.4.6.1
BOARD BOX FAN
N/A
3.4.7.1
PW FAN
N/A
3.4.7.2
HDD FAN
N/A
3.4.7.3
SUCTION FAN
FAN ASSY.,ABSORPTION,ASSY., ESL,ASP
3.4.7.4
TAKE-UP REEL COVER
COVER,WINDER,DRIVE
TAKE-UP REEL SENSOR
LEFT COVER
COVER,LEFT,MR
LEFT LOWER COVER
COVER,LEFT,MR,LOWER
RIGHT COVER
COVER,RIGHT,MR
RIGHT LOWER COVER COVER,RIGHT,MR,LOWER RIGHT REAR COVER
APPENDIX
Table 6-1. Conversion Table
COVER,RIGHT,MR,SUB
3.4.9.6 3.4.9.7 3.4.9.8
2nd PPK ROLLER ASSY N/A
3.4.9.9
SUB-C BOARD
3.4.9.10
BOARD ASSY.,SUB
2nd Roll Unit
Part names used in this manual
388 Confidential
SC-T7200/SC-T5200/SC-T3200/SC-T7200D/SC-T5200D series
Revision A
6.5 Status Sheet The following explains how to read the Status Sheet.
Table 6-2. Contents of the Status Sheet Information name
Description
Sheet Print Date
The date when the Status sheet is printed
Model
Model name
Printer Serial No.
Serial No.
Printer Firmware Version
Firmware version
Printer Initial Setup Date
Printer install date
IP Address
IP address
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
Gateway Address
Gateway address
1) Printer Status Setting Page Line
Setting of the Page Line
Margin
Setting of the Margin
Media Size Check
Setting of the Media Size Check
Media Skew Check
Setting of the Media Skew Check
Refresh Margin
Setting of the Refresh Margin
2) Preference Setting Language
Setting of the Language
Unit: Length
Setting of the Unit: Length
Alert Lamp Setting
Setting of the Alert Lamp Setting
3) Printer Usage Information Printer Mechanism Usage
Accumulated printed pages
4) Cosumable Usage Information Current Ink Cartridge Info
Remaining amounts of ink cartridges and the date when the cartridges are initially installed.
Current Drain Tank Info
Remaining free space of Maintenance Box and the date when the box is initially installed.
5) Error History Figure 6-1. Status Sheet (sample)
APPENDIX
Error Code /Date
Status Sheet
The error codes of 6 latest errors and their date and time of occurrence.
390 Confidential